JP6264323B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

  There are known gaming machines that perform various types of determination, such as determination of whether or not a game ball is won at a start winning opening and determination of a display effect mode. In such a gaming machine, it is determined whether or not a value of a determination value (for example, a random number counter or the like) matches a predetermined set value, and if the determination value matches the set value, the setting value is handled. The processing set in this way (determination of the effect mode, etc.) is executed.

JP 2002-331078 A

  However, a more suitable setting value setting method has been demanded.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably setting a set value.

Gaming machine of claim 1, wherein in order to achieve the object, a updating means for updating the determined value with a predetermined range, an obtaining unit capable of obtaining the judgment value, said acquired by the acquiring means possess a judging means for judging on the basis of the determination value with a predetermined set value, and control means for executing the set on the basis of the by that determination result to the determining means processing, the acquisition by the acquisition unit been when said determination value is determined to be different from the specific determination value and the set value, have a acquisition control means for acquired by the acquisition means the determination value newly updated by the update unit The number set in the specific determination value is set to the set value with respect to the difference between the number of determination values in the predetermined range and the number set in the specific determination value. ratio of the number is at least Are those set can be an integer when expressed in fraction.

A gaming machine according to a second aspect of the present invention is the gaming machine according to the first aspect, comprising display means for indicating the discrimination result.

According to the gaming machine of claim 1, the updating unit that updates the determination value within a predetermined range, the acquisition unit that can acquire the determination value, and the determination value acquired by the acquisition unit are predetermined. A determination means for determining based on the set value and a control means for executing processing set based on the determination result by the determination means, wherein the determination value acquired by the acquisition means is the if the set value is determined to be the different specific determination value, the said judgment value newly updated by the updating means includes an acquisition control means for acquired by the acquisition unit, the specific determination value number that is set, based on the difference between the number of the set in the number and the specific determination value of the determination value of the predetermined range, the ratio of the number set in the setting value is at least a percentage in The place you have written Are those set can be a integer.

Therefore , there is an effect that the set value can be set more suitably.

According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine of the first aspect, the following effect can be obtained. That is, it has a display means for indicating the discrimination result.

Therefore, there is an effect that the discrimination result can be displayed in an easily distinguishable display mode.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is the figure which showed typically the area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, (b) is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of the various counters in 1st Embodiment. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM of the main controller in 1st Embodiment, (b) showed typically the structure of RAM of the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of the 1st random number counter C1 in 1st Embodiment and the jackpot determination value in a special symbol, (b) is 1st in 1st Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of the hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type in the special symbol, (c) schematically shows the correspondence between the second hit random number counter C4 and the hit in the normal symbol It is a schematic diagram. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of the fluctuation pattern selection table, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the fluctuation pattern table for jackpots, (c), It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table, (d) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the fluctuation pattern table for deviation (probability change). (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM of the sound lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment, (b) is typical structure of RAM of the sound lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram shown in. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of the notice effect table, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the jackpot notice effect selection table typically, (c), It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the notice effect selection table for detachment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a display control apparatus. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing explaining a power-on image. (A) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface A, (b) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface B. FIG. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface C. FIG. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display data table typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the transfer data table typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the drawing list typically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol change start process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interruption process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation display setting process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the notice effect selection processing performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the notice re-selection process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the command interruption process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the V interruption process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation pattern command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the stop classification command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. It is the flowchart which showed the announcement effect command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the opening command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the round number command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. . It is the flowchart which showed the ending command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the back image change command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the error command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. It is the flowchart which showed the display setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the warning image setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the pointer update process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the resident image transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. It is the flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the drawing process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of the various counters in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM of the main controller in 2nd Embodiment, (b) is typically the structure of RAM of the audio lamp controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is the shown schematic diagram. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the variation pattern table for jackpots in 2nd Embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram of the content of the (normal) variation pattern table for detachment in 2nd Embodiment. (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table in the second embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation start process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main reselection process performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process 2 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the weight progress effect process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment, (b) is typical structure of RAM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram shown in. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the production counter initial value table in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process 3 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process 3 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the notification effect selection process 3 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the reacquisition process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of the various counters in 4th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM of the main controller in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process 4 performed by MPU in the main controller in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process 4 performed by MPU in the main controller in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process 5 performed by MPU in the main controller in the modification of 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the winning process performed by MPU in the main controller in the modification of 4th Embodiment. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM of the sound lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment, (b) is typical structure of RAM of the sound lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram shown in. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of the fluctuation pattern selection table in 5th Embodiment, (b) is the schematic which showed typically the structure of the super reach selection table in 5th Embodiment. It is a figure, (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot super reach selection table in the fifth embodiment, (d) is a diagram of the outreach super reach selection table in the fifth embodiment It is the schematic diagram which showed the content typically. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of the pseudo | simulation variation complementation effect selection table in 5th Embodiment, (b) is the content of the complement effect selection table for jackpots in 5th Embodiment typically. (C) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the complementary effect selection table for a removal in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process 6 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation display setting process 6 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation pattern selection process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the change reselection process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed of a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball ball game is performed when the ball flows down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 5) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side of the front frame 14 are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower dish unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. 14 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes forward and the upper surface is opened, and prize balls and rental balls are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. This frame button 22 is used by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2), which will be described later, or changing the effect of Super Reach. Operated.

  The stage is an effect mode in which the various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are unified, and in the pachinko machine 10, there are 3 types of “city stage”, “empty stage”, and “island stage”. There are two stages. And, various effects such as variation effects and reach effects that are performed along with the entry to the first entrance 64 (start prize), which will be described later, are designed according to the theme given to each stage. Has been. The stage is changed when the frame button 22 is operated by the player during a period when the fluctuating effect is not performed or during high-speed fluctuation, and every time the frame button 22 is operated, the “city stage” → “empty stage” "→" Island Stage "→" City Stage "→ ... Further, immediately after the power is turned on, the “city street stage” is set as the initial stage.

  On the other hand, the 3rd symbol display device 81 is configured to display a selection screen for a super reach effect mode during normal reach when the normal reach effect is started and the normal reach is developed to the super reach. When the frame button 22 is operated by the player while the selection screen is displayed, the contents of the effect at the time of super reach are changed.

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around it (for example, a corner portion). These light-emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing or controlling the light-emitting mode by turning on or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effects. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has built-in light emitting means such as LEDs and can display the payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, on the lower side of the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) is visible from the front surface of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to an area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42 and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing a ball that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is disposed, and the operation of the ball launching unit 112a is permitted inside the operation handle 51. Touch sensor 51a, a push button-type stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 by a change in electric resistance (Not shown). When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the operation amount, and according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. Thus, the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “a thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of ball nails, windmills and rails 61 and 62, a general winning opening 63, The ball entrance 64, the variable winning device 65, the variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the peripheral edge thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. The general winning port 63, the first winning port 64, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and the wood screw is provided from the front side of the game board 13. It is fixed by etc. Further, the front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the strip-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and rear. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a front surface of the game board 13 and is a substantially circular area formed by dividing the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 (a winning hole or the like is provided, Area).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 5) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere, and the ball launched at a predetermined momentum or more hits the return rubber 69 and gains momentum. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated. A resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62 is a base. The plate 60 is driven and fixed.

  In this pachinko machine 10, when a ball enters the first entrance 64, a special symbol (first design) is drawn, and the ball passes through the through gate (also referred to as the second entrance) 67. In such a case, a lottery of a normal symbol (second symbol) is performed. In the special symbol lottery performed for the entrance to the first entrance 64, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined, and if it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, Is also determined. When a special symbol wins, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a special game state, and the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is until a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds elapses or 10 balls are won). ) Is released, and the opening is repeated 5 times (5 rounds). As a result, a large amount of balls are awarded to the specific winning opening 65a, so that a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. There are two types of special symbol jackpot types: “Big Jack A” and “Big Jack B”. After the special gaming state is over, the added value after the jackpot is over, according to these jackpot types Value (game value) is given to the player.

  In addition, when the special symbol (the first symbol) is drawn, the special symbol variable display is started on the first symbol display device 37, and after a predetermined time (for example, 7 seconds to 60 seconds) has elapsed, A special symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. When a ball enters the first entrance 64 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of times the ball is held is held up to four times, and the number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display. It is shown by the device 37 and also in the third symbol display device 81. When the variable display is completed in the first symbol display device 37, if the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 remains, the next special symbol is drawn and the variable display corresponding to the lottery is performed. Is started. In addition, the specific winning opening 65a that is opened and closed when the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special gaming state is provided immediately below the first entrance 64. Therefore, during the special game state, the player hits a ball in an attempt to win the specific winning opening 65a, so that a lot of balls also enter the first entrance 64. Therefore, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is in the special game state, the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 is maximum (four times).

  On the other hand, in the normal symbol lottery performed for the passage of the ball in the through gate 67, whether or not the normal symbol is hit is determined. When hitting the normal symbol, the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is released for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), and the ball easily enters the first entrance 64. It becomes a state. That is, when a normal symbol is hit, it becomes easy for a ball to enter the first entrance 64, and as a result, a special symbol is easily drawn.

  In addition, when the normal symbol (the second symbol) is drawn, the normal symbol variation display is started on the second symbol display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds or 30 seconds) has elapsed, A normal symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If the ball passes through the through gate 67 while the variable symbol display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passages is retained up to four times, and the number of retained balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37. In addition, the second symbol holding lamp 84 is also shown. When the variable display is completed in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the through gate 67 remains, the next normal symbol lottery is performed and the variable display corresponding to the lottery is started. The

  As described above, there are two types of special jackpot types, “Big Jack A” and “Big Jack B”.

  In both cases of “big hit A” and “big hit B”, the number of rounds becomes a special game state with 16 rounds (16R jackpot), and then the added value after the big hit ends is given. More specifically, in the “jackpot A”, as a value added after the jackpot ends, the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state of the special symbol from the end of the jackpot until the next jackpot (the probability of the special symbol being changed) And shift to the normal state of short time. On the other hand, in the “big hit B”, as the added value after the big hit, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the short time state of the normal symbol from the end of the big hit until the special symbol lottery ends 100 times.

  Here, the “high probability state of a special symbol” means a state where the probability of hitting a special symbol is increased, a so-called special symbol probability change state (during special symbol probability change), in other words, a special game state (16R jackpot) ) Is a game state that is easy to shift to. On the other hand, a case that is not a “high probability state of a special symbol” is called a “low probability state of a special symbol”, which has a lower probability of jackpot than the probability variation state of a special symbol, that is, the jackpot probability of a special symbol is normal. Indicates the state (normal state of special symbol). The “normal symbol time-short state” (ordinary symbol time-short state) means a game state in which the probability of hitting the normal symbol increases and the ball easily enters the first entrance 64. On the other hand, when it is not “normal symbol short-time state”, it is called “normal symbol normal state”, which means that the normal symbol hit probability is normal, that is, the hit probability is lower than during short-time. Indicates.

  In the present embodiment, when the special symbol probability change state is given after the special gaming state ends (that is, after the “big hit A” end), the special symbol probability change state continues until the next jackpot. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of times may be limited. Specifically, for example, a special symbol probability change state (high probability state) is given until the special symbol lottery ends 10 times after the special gaming state ends, and after the special symbol lottery ends 10 times. May be configured to be set to a low probability state of a special symbol. In addition, the number of times that the special symbol is changed to a certain state is not limited to 10 and may be arbitrarily determined. Similarly, in the present embodiment, it is configured so that the short time period of the normal symbol is set to 100 times until the special symbol lottery ends 100 times after the “big hit B” ends. It is not restricted and may be determined arbitrarily.

  A first pattern provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as “LEDs”) 37a and a 7-segment display 37b as light emitting means on the upper right portion (right upper portion in FIG. 2) of the game area when viewed from the front. A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 displays information corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a perform a variable display by indicating whether or not a special symbol lottery performed in accordance with a ball entering the first ball slot 64 (start winning prize) is being executed or not. As a stopped symbol after the end, a special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is indicated by a lighting state, or variation is not executed among the balls that have entered the first entrance 64. The number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls), is indicated by the lighting state.

  If a ball enters the first entrance 64 while the special symbol (the first symbol) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of times that the ball has entered is suspended up to four times. The number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the entrance to the first entrance 64 is configured to be suspended up to 4 times, but the maximum number of suspensions is not limited to 4 times, but 3 times or less. Alternatively, the number may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times).

  The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds that are a big hit and an error display. Note that the LEDs 37a are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and depending on the combination of the emission colors, various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 (high probability states of special symbols) And normal symbols, etc.). In addition, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, but if it is a big hit, it corresponds to the big hit type (big hit A, big hit B) A special symbol (first symbol) is shown.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning openings 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. . The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 performs a decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a ball enters the first entrance 64 (start winning prize), a special symbol (first symbol) is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 as a trigger. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a 12.1 inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by a display control device 114 to be described later, for example, three symbol rows of left, middle and right Is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 is performed on the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 displays on the first symbol display device 37. Corresponding decorative display is performed. Instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 4, the display content of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 is demonstrated. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining a display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 4 (a) is a diagram schematically showing area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, FIG. 4B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

  The third symbol is composed of ten kinds of main symbols with numbers from “0” to “9”. Each main symbol is composed of numbers from “0” to “9” on the rear symbol consisting of a wooden box, of which the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are A large number is added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbols with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) have attached symbols that imitate characters such as furoshiki, helmet, etc., almost full front of the wooden box, An even number is small in green on the lower right side of the attached symbol and is added so as to be displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 5) described later is a big hit, the variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed. The jackpot is configured to occur after the change display is finished. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of place, the variable display in which the same main symbols are not arranged is performed.

  For example, if the lottery result of the special symbol is “Large A”, a variable display is performed in which the main symbols to which “1, 3, 5, 7, 9”, which is an odd number, are added are aligned. Further, if “big hit B”, the variable display is performed in which the main symbols to which the even numbers “0, 2, 4, 6, 8” are added are arranged. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is off, the variable display in which the main symbols of the same number are not aligned is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 4 (a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into two in the vertical direction, and the lower 2/3 is the main display area Dm for variably displaying the third symbol, and the others. The upper third is a sub display area Ds for displaying a notice effect, a character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

  The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 of left, middle, and right, and three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each symbol row Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers in each symbol row Z1 to Z3, and the symbols are scrolled from top to bottom with periodicity for each symbol row Z1 to Z3. In particular, the left symbol row Z1 is arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, and the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3 are arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

  In the main display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as the active line L1, and in each game, the third symbol stops on the active line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1, the right symbol row Z3, and the middle symbol row Z2. Is displayed. If the combination of jackpot symbols (the same main symbol combination in this embodiment) is arranged on the effective line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, a jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

  On the other hand, the sub display area Ds is horizontally long above the main display area Dm, and is further equally divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Among these, the small area Ds1 is an area for displaying the number of reserved balls, which is the number of spheres that have not been changed (reserved spheres) among the balls that have entered the first entrance 64, and the small area Ds2 And Ds3 are areas for displaying the notice effect image.

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 4B, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub display area Ds, a moving image is displayed in the small area Ds3 on the right, and it is suggested to the player that the player is more likely to make a big hit than usual. In the central small area Ds2, a predetermined character (a boy with a bee in this embodiment) usually performs a predetermined action and sometimes performs a special action different from the predetermined action, or another character appears. The announcement effect is performed by putting out.

  On the other hand, when a ball enters the first entrance 64 while the variable display is performed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 (1st symbol display device 37), the number of entrances is up to 4 times. The number of held balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one reserved ball number symbol is displayed per one reserved ball number, and the number of reserved balls is displayed according to the display number of the reserved ball number symbol. That is, when one reserved ball number symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is one ball, and when four reserved ball number symbols are displayed, the number of reserved balls is Indicates 4 balls. In addition, when the number of reserved balls is not displayed in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball.

  In the present embodiment, the ball entering the first ball inlet 64 is configured to be held up to four times, but the maximum number of balls to be held is not limited to four times, but three times. You may set below or 5 times (for example, 8 times). Moreover, it replaces with the display of the number of reservation balls in small area Ds1, and the aspect which changes the number of reservation balls by a part in the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81, or the area divided into four by the number of reservation balls (For example, the color or lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of held balls, corresponding to the maximum number of held balls, and the number of held balls may be displayed according to the number of held lamps that are lit.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. The second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display by indicating whether or not the normal symbol lottery performed as the ball passes through the through gate 67 is being performed, or after the variation ends. As a stop symbol, a normal symbol (second symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the normal symbol is indicated by a lighting state.

  More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, every time the sphere passes through the through gate 67, a variable display that alternately turns on the symbol “◯” and the symbol “x” as the second symbol is displayed. Done. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol “◯”), the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is activated for a predetermined time. As a result, it is configured such that a ball easily enters the first entrance 64. The number of passes through which the ball has passed through the through gate 67 is held up to 4 times, and the number of held balls is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and also lit on the second symbol hold lamp 84. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided corresponding to the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  The normal symbol (second symbol) variable display is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display device 37. Alternatively, a part of the third symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the passage of the sphere at the through gate 67 is not limited to four times as in the case of the first entrance 64, and is not limited to four times, but three times or less (for example, (8 times). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol reservation lamp 84 may not perform lighting display.

  Below the variable display device unit 80, a first entrance 64 into which a sphere can enter is disposed. When a ball enters the first entrance 64, a first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance switch is turned on. The main controller 110 draws a special symbol, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37 a of the first symbol display device 37. The first entrance 64 is also one of the entrances through which 5 balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters.

  A variable winning device 65 is disposed below the first ball opening 64, and a horizontally-long rectangular specific winning port (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the special symbol lottery performed by the main controller 110 is a big win, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on so that the big win is stopped after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) has elapsed. In addition, a stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the game state transitions to a special game state (16 rounds of big hit) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. In this special gaming state, the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or ten balls have been won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated 16 times (16 rounds). The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is one form of a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player. Is done.

  Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And. The special winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to win the specific winning opening 65a. It operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.

  Note that the special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. When the game area is provided with a large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and the LED 37a corresponding to the jackpot is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the specific winning opening A special gaming state is defined as a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning port 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball 65 is opened into the specific winning port 65a. You may make it form.

  Adhesive spaces K1 and K2 for adhering certificate stamps, identification labels, and the like are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13. It can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that has not entered any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a is guided through an out port 66 to a ball discharge path (not shown). A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (instruments) such as a windmill are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This seal seal is made of a brittle material. If the seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102, or if the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are removed. Cut to the side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 5). ing. Balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 130, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 5). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

<Electrical Configuration in First Embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  First, the contents of the ROM 202 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 7A, the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 stores, as part of the fixed value data, a first per-random number table 202a, a first per-type selection table 202b, and a second per-random number table 202c. , And a variation pattern table 202d are stored at least.

  The first hit random number table 202a (see FIG. 8A) is a data table in which a jackpot determination value of a first hit random number counter C1 described later is stored. Specifically, only “0” is defined as the jackpot determination value in the low probability state of the special symbol, and ten “0-9” jackpot determination values in the high probability state (probability variation state) of the special symbol are defined. Judgment value is defined. A special symbol when the value of the first per-random number counter C1 acquired based on the starting prize matches one of the determination values defined in the first per-random number table 202a (see FIG. 8A). Is determined to be a big hit.

  The first hit type selection table 202b (FIG. 8B) is a data table in which determination values for determining the big hit type are stored, and the determination value of the first hit type counter C2 is assigned to each big hit type. It is defined in association. Specifically, “big hit A” is defined in association with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “0 to 63”. In addition, in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “64 to 127”, “big hit B” is associated and defined. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b, and the first hit type selection table 202b is compared. A jackpot type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C2 is selected.

  The second hit random number table 202c (FIG. 8C) is a data table in which a hit determination value for a normal symbol is stored. Specifically, “5 to 20” is defined as a determination value that is a hit of the normal symbol in the normal state of the normal symbol (see FIG. 8C). Further, in the high probability state of the normal symbol, “5 to 212” is defined as a determination value that is a hit of the normal symbol (see FIG. 8C). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, referring to the value of the second per-random number counter C4 acquired based on the passing of the ball through the through gate 67 and the second per-random number table 202c, It is determined whether or not there is.

  The variation pattern table 202d (see FIGS. 9A to 9D) is a data table in which the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for determining the variation pattern display mode is defined for each display mode. Details of the variation pattern table 202d will be described later together with the description of the variation type counter CS1.

  In main controller 110, special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display setting on first symbol display device 37, display setting on second symbol display device 83, and display setting on third symbol display device 81 The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 6, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. These counters, etc., are a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting on the first symbol display device 37, a display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting on the third symbol display device 81. For example, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is used.

  In order to select a special symbol lottery and the first symbol random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol lottery for setting the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 The first per-type counter C2 used for the selection, the stop-type selection counter C3 used for selecting the out-of-service stop type in the special symbol, and the first initial value random number used for setting the initial value of the first per-random number counter C1 A counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used. In addition, the second random number counter C4 is used for lottery of normal symbols, and the second initial random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 27). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a including one execution area and four reservation areas (holding first to fourth areas), and each of these areas has a first entrance slot. Each value of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored in accordance with the timing of entering the ball 64. In addition, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b composed of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through any of the through gates 67.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The first per-random number counter C1 is incremented one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 255) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 255 for a counter that can take a value of 0 to 255). It is the composition which returns to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 255, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 255. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 26).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the special symbol holding ball in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. It is stored in the storage area 203a. The random number value that is a big hit of the special symbol is set by the first random number table 202a (FIG. 8A) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1. Is determined to be a special symbol jackpot if it matches the value of the random jackpot value set by the first random number table. The first random number table 202a is used for a low probability of a special symbol (a period in which the special symbol is in a low probability state) and a high probability of a special symbol having a high probability of being a big hit than the low probability (special). The period is a high probability state of the symbol), and the number of random numbers that are jackpots included in each is set differently. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers that are jackpots, the probability of jackpots is changed between when the special symbol has a low probability and when the special symbol has a high probability.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when the special symbol is a big hit, and increments one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 127). Then, after reaching the maximum value (for example, 127 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 127), it returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the special symbol holding in the RAM 203 is held at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. It is stored in the sphere storage area 203a.

  Here, if the value of the first per-random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, that is, if it is a random number that is out of the special symbol, the first The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol is off.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first per-random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, it corresponds to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37. The display mode is that of the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 255. In the first per-random number counter C1, there is one random value that is a big hit of the special symbol when the special symbol has a low probability, and the random value “0” is stored in the first per-random number table for the low probability. It is stored (see FIG. 8A). In this way, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 1 among the total number of random number values, so the probability that the special symbol jackpot is “1/256”.

  On the other hand, at the time of high probability of the special symbol, there are 10 random numbers that are big hits of the special symbol, and the values “0-9” are stored in the first random number table for high probability ( (See FIG. 8 (a)). As described above, when the special symbol has a high probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 10 among the total number of random number values, so the probability that the special symbol jackpot is “10/256”.

  Further, the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 128. Then, as shown in FIG. 8B, in the first hit type counter C2, the big hit type when the random value is “0 to 63” is “big hit A”. The jackpot type when the value is “64 to 127” is “jackpot B”. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured such that two types of hit types (big hit A and big hit B) are determined based on the random number value indicated by the first hit type counter C2.

  The stop type selection counter C3 is configured so that, for example, 1 is added in order within a range of 0 to 127, for example, and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 127), it returns to 0. In the present embodiment, the stop type at the time of release displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is selected by the stop type selection counter C3, and after reach occurs, the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol. “Rear out of front / rear” (for example, 125 to 127), and “reach other than front / rear out of reach” (for example, a range of 116 to 124) in which the final stop symbol stops other than before and after the reach symbol after the occurrence of reach. Three stop (rendering) patterns are selected that are “completely out” (for example, a range of 0 to 115) that does not cause reach. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the special symbol holding ball is stored in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. It is stored in the area 203a.

  The random value for determining the stop type of the special symbol from the value (random number value) of the stop type selection counter C3 is set by a stop type selection table (not shown). It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. In this embodiment, this table is divided into a special symbol for high probability and a special symbol for low probability, and a random value range set for each outage stop type according to the table. Is changing. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol high probability state or a special symbol low probability state.

  For example, in a high-probability state, the range of random values corresponding to the stop type “completely out” is “0 to 115” so that a jackpot is likely to occur and the reach effect is not selected more than necessary. Table is selected, and “completely out” is easily selected. In this table, “front / rear detachment reach” is narrowed to 125 to 127 and “reach other than front / rear detachment” is also narrowed to 116 to 124, so that “rearward / rearward detachment reach” and “reach other than front / rear detachment” are difficult to select. In the low probability state, the random value range corresponding to the stop type “completely out” is 0 to 101 and the probability is low so as to secure the time for entering the ball into the first entrance 64. Table is selected, and “completely out” is difficult to select.

  In this stop type selection table, the range of random values corresponding to the stop type of “reach other than front / rear out” is widened to 102 to 124, and “reach other than front / rear out” is easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, it is possible to perform a lot of reach display with a long production time, so it is possible to secure the time for entering the ball into the first entrance 64 and the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 is continued. It becomes easy to be done. Also in the latter table, the range of random number values corresponding to the stop type of “front / rear out of reach” is set to 125 to 127.

  The variation type counter CS1 is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 256, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 256). Rough display modes such as so-called normal reach and super reach are determined by the variation type counter CS1. Specifically, the display mode is determined by determining the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine the reach type of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the detailed symbol variation mode. The The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time a main process (see FIG. 27) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. A variation pattern table (see FIG. 9A) storing a random number value for determining one variation time of symbol variation from the value (random number value) of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. Is provided.

  Here, the variation pattern table 202d will be described with reference to FIGS. As shown in FIG. 9A, the variation pattern table 202d includes a jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 (see FIG. 9B) and a release (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 9C). And a deviation (probability change) variation pattern table 202d3 (see FIG. 9D) is set at least.

  First, the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1. The jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern to be selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot. As a variation pattern of the jackpot, various types of normal reach (30 seconds), various types of super reach (60 seconds), and special reach (90 seconds) are defined. In the big hit variation pattern table 202d1, each variation pattern is associated with each value of the variation type counter CS1.

  Specifically, as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1, a range of “0 to 63” is associated with various normal reach (30 seconds) variation patterns, and a range of “64 to 223” is a variety of super reach. Variation patterns of (60 seconds) are associated with each other, and variations of special reach (90 seconds) are associated with the range of “224 to 255”. When the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 selects a variation pattern when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the variation pattern in which the determination value corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 that has been acquired is set. It is selected from the big hit variation pattern table 202d1.

  FIG. 9C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2. The deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern selected when the special symbol lottery result is out of place in the low probability state of the special symbol. . If the special symbol lottery result is out of place, as described above, whether the stop type is completely out (non-reach) or out of reach (reach common) from the stop type selection table (not shown) It is determined by the value of the selection counter C3. Specifically, for example, when the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is within the range of “0 to 101” in the low probability state of the special symbol, the complete outage is set, and when the value is within the range of “102 to 127”, the outreach reach is set. Set (reach out of front / rear, reach out of front / rear).

  Here, when the variation pattern type is complete deviation, either a short deviation (7 seconds) with a relatively short variation time or a long deviation (10 seconds) with a relatively long variation time is set. “0 to 127” is set as the judgment value for the short deviation (7 seconds), and “128 to 255” is set as the judgment value for the fluctuation type counter CS1 for the long deviation (10 seconds).

  Further, for outreach, various types of outreach normal reach (30 seconds) are within the range of the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 “0 to 191”, and various types of outreach reach are within the range of “192 to 254”. (60 seconds) is set to “255”, and various special reach values (90 seconds) are set.

  In this way, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 determines the stop type when the special symbol lottery result is out of the normal gaming state, and the fluctuation obtained from the out (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2. Based on the value of the type counter CS1, a variation pattern is selected from the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2.

  FIG. 9D is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3. The deviation (probability change) variation pattern table 202d3 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern selected when the special symbol lottery is lost in the special symbol probability variation state. This deviation (probable variation) variation pattern table 202d3 is different in that the value of the variation type counter CS1 that is set is different from the aforementioned variation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2.

  As described above, when the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 115” according to a stop type selection table (not shown), complete losing is determined. , If it is within the range of “116 to 127”, the reach reach (rear-rear reach, reach other than front-rear reach) is determined.

  In this way, when the probability variation gaming state is higher than the normal gaming state, the probability of reaching when the player is out of play is set lower. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the deviation fluctuation time from becoming longer at the time of probability change and the period until the big hit from being prolonged. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the game is bored during the probability-changing game state where it is easy to make a big hit and the player feels bored.

  The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 255, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 255). Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In this embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated periodically, for example, every timer interrupt process, and is acquired when it is detected that the ball has passed through the left or right through gate 67, and the RAM 203 Are stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b.

  The random number value that is a normal symbol hit is set by a second random number table (see FIG. 8C) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is If the value of the winning random number set by the second random number table matches, it is determined that the symbol is a normal symbol. In addition, this second random number table is used for a low probability of a normal symbol (a period in which the normal symbol is in a normal state), and a high probability (a normal symbol of a normal symbol) that has a higher probability of being a normal symbol than the low probability. The number of random numbers that are jackpots included in each is set differently. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers to be won, the probability of winning is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the normal symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 8 (c), there are 24 random numbers that are hit by the normal symbol when the normal symbol has a low probability, and the range is “5 to 20”. These random number values are stored in the second random number table for low probability. As described above, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 16 while the total number of random number values is 256. Therefore, the probability of jacking a special symbol is “1/16”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired, and the variation display of the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. Is executed for 30 seconds. Then, if the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 20”, it is determined that the winning symbol is selected, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is ended, the stop symbol (second symbol) is displayed. ), The symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the first entrance 64 is opened for “0.2 seconds × 1 time”. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, the first entrance 64 is opened for “0.2 seconds × one time” when the normal symbol is hit. The opening time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, “0.5 seconds × 2 times” may be opened.

  On the other hand, when there is a high probability of a normal symbol, there are 200 random numbers that are jackpots of the normal symbol, and the range is “5 to 212”. These random number values are stored in the second random number table for high probability. Thus, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 208 while the total number of random numbers is 256, so the probability that the special symbol jackpot is “1 / 1.2”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the second symbol display device 83 displays the variation of the normal symbol. Is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 212”, it is determined that the symbol is a normal symbol. In this case, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol “◯” is lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol), and the first entrance 64 is “two times per second”. "Open. In this way, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the variation display time is very short, “30 seconds → 3 seconds”, compared to when the normal symbol has a low probability, and further, the first entrance 64 is opened. Since the period becomes very long as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the first entrance 64. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is at a high probability of a normal symbol, the first entrance 64 is opened “only twice per second” when the normal symbol is hit. The time and number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, “3 seconds × 3 times” may be opened.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 255), and is updated once every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19). And repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 27).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 performs the big win lottery and the display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the value of the counter and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 5, the description will be continued. The RAM 203 stores various flags and counters. Here, details of the RAM 203 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 7B, the RAM 203 includes a special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, a special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c, a normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d, and a probability variation. It has at least a flag 203e, an hour / medium counter 203f, a jackpot flag 203g, a counter buffer 203y, and another memory area 203z.

  The special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). Each of these areas has a first per-random number counter. Each value of C1, first hit type counter C2, and stop type selection counter C3 is stored.

  More specifically, each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 is acquired at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning), and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first). Among the vacant areas (1 area to reserved 4th area), the areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, as the area number is smaller, the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored in the first reserved area. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when the special control lottery is performed in the main controller 110, the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a are transferred to the execution area. Based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 that are shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area, a determination such as lottery of a special symbol is performed.

  Note that when data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which winning data stored in other reserved areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) is packed into a holding area having a smaller area number (holding first area to holding third area). Done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, data is shifted only for the reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which winning data is stored.

  In the present pachinko machine 10, when a ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning) and each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired according to the start winning, a big hit lottery of the original special symbol Separately, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed is predicted (estimated) from the obtained values of the respective counters C1 to C3. In this way, before the original special symbol lottery is performed, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed based on the data corresponding to the start prize (each value of each counter C1 to C3). The prediction is described as prefetching the lottery result of the special symbol. Note that the various types of information correspond to success / failure, stop type, variation pattern, and the like.

  When the prefetching is completed, a winning information command including various types of information (presence / absence, stop type, variation pattern) obtained by the prefetching is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. When the winning information command is received by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts the success / failure type, the stop type, and the variation pattern from the winning information command, and uses them as winning information for the special symbol 1 or The special symbol 2 is stored in the winning information storage area 223a of the corresponding special symbol.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the main control device 110 has a start prize, each value of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-class type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start prize Then, various information (whether it is determined, stop type, variation pattern) obtained by drawing a special symbol corresponding to the start winning is predicted. The prediction (prefetching) is configured to refer to the jackpot determination value according to the gaming state (normal gaming state or probability variation gaming state) at the time when the variation corresponding to the start winning is started. . Thereby, the lottery result of the special symbol corresponding to the start winning can be accurately predicted.

  Similarly to the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b has one execution area and four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). In each of these areas, a second random number counter C4 is stored.

  More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the through gate 67, and the acquired data is vacant in four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). Are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, as with the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when the main controller 110 performs a lottery for the normal symbol, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as lottery for a normal symbol is performed.

  Note that when the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, as in the case of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the prizes stored in the other reserved areas are stored. A shift process is performed in which data is packed into a reserved area having an area number smaller by 1. The data is also shifted only for the reserved area where the winning data is stored.

  The special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is a variation display (third symbol display) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 on the basis of the entrance to the first entrance 64 (start winning prize). It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the variable display performed by the device 81 up to four times. This special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is set to an initial value of zero, and every time a ball enters the first entrance 64 and the number of held balls in the variable display increases, the maximum value 4 is increased to 1. Addition is performed (see S404 in FIG. 22). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 every time a special symbol variation display is newly executed (see S205 in FIG. 20).

  The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number N of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (see S206 in FIG. 20 and S405 in FIG. 22). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 every time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is changed.

  The voice lamp control device 113 uses the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 every time the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c is changed, and the variable display hold ball held in the main control device 110. You can get the value of the number itself. As a result, the number of held balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol held ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 is the actual number of held balls in the variable display held in the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it is deviated from, the deviation can be corrected by the next number of reserved balls command received.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of held balls based on the number of held balls command, and each time the number of held balls changes, the display hold for notifying the display control device 114 of the number of held balls. Send the ball number command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

  The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d displays the number of held balls (the number of waiting times) of the normal symbol (second symbol) displayed on the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball in the through gate 67 up to four times. It is a counter that counts up to. The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d has an initial value set to zero, and is incremented by 1 to a maximum value of 4 each time the ball passes through the through gate 67 and the number of held balls for variable display increases. (See S604 in FIG. 24). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 every time a variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S505 in FIG. 23).

  When the ball passes through the through gate 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol M) is less than 4. The acquired data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b (S605 in FIG. 24). On the other hand, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (S603: No in FIG. 24). ).

  The probability variation flag 203e is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probability variation state (a high probability state of a special symbol). If the value of the probability variation flag 203e is on, the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol state. If the value of the probability variation flag 203e is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol normal state (special symbol low probability state). The probability variation flag 203e is set to ON when the initial value is set to OFF and it is determined in the jackpot control process that the end timing of the jackpot A (16R probability variation jackpot) is reached (S1015 in FIG. 28). reference). Then, in the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 21), it is referred to to determine whether or not the gaming state is a probable variation state (see S302 in FIG. 21), and is turned off when the next jackpot game is started. It is set (see S214 in FIG. 20).

  Specifically, when the special symbol variation start process (FIG. 21, S208) is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed. In the special symbol fluctuation start process (FIG. 21, S208), the value of the probability variation flag 203e is referred to. If the value is ON, the special symbol lottery is selected based on the first random number table 202a for high probability. On the other hand, if the value of the probability variation flag 203e is OFF, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the low probability first random number table 202a.

  The hour / minute counter 203f is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol time / short state. When the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is greater than 0, the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol time / short state. If the value of the time reduction counter 203f is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol. At this time, the short / medium counter 203f is set to 100 at the end of the big hit B (short hit big at 16R) (see S1014 in FIG. 28). Then, it is referred to determine whether or not the time is shortened in the normal symbol variation process (see S508, S514, and S519 in FIG. 23). In the special symbol variation process, 1 is subtracted every time the variation time elapses. (See S217 in FIG. 20). Note that in the normal symbol variation process, even if the value of the time reduction / medium counter 203f is 0, if the above-described probability variation flag 203e is on, the pachinko machine 10 is determined to be in the normal symbol time reduction state (S508 in FIG. 23). , S514, S519). As a result, after the jackpot A is over, it is possible to maintain the special symbol probable state and the normal symbol time-short state until the next jackpot, which is extremely advantageous for the player. Therefore, since it is possible to play a game with one goal of being a jackpot A, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  The jackpot flag 203g is a flag indicating whether or not the jackpot (special game state) is in progress. If the value of the jackpot flag 203g is on, it means that the jackpot is being hit, and if it is off, it means that the jackpot is not being hit. The jackpot flag 203g is a jackpot due to the special symbol lottery, and the jackpot (special game state) is started and set to ON (see S1003 in FIG. 28). Also, it is set to OFF at the end of the jackpot (special game state) (see S1016 in FIG. 28). In the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 20), the jackpot flag 203g is referred to and it is determined whether or not the jackpot is being hit (see S201 in FIG. 20).

  The counter buffer 203y includes the counters described above (first random number counter C1, first hit type counter C2, stop type selection counter C3, first initial value random number counter CINI1, variation type counter CS1, second random number counter C4. , A storage area for storing the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2). The counter value stored in the counter buffer 203y is stored in the special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a or the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203b.

  The other memory area 203z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-described data. An area for temporarily storing other counter values used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, and the MPU 201 A stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the CPU, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, and a work area (work area) for storing various flags and counters, I / O values, etc. Have.

  Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main process (see FIG. 27), and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by a startup process (see FIG. 26) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 25) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 constituted by an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a second symbol hold lamp 84, and a lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 made up of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the MPU 201 via the input / output port 205. Send.

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown) and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. And various processes are executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 25) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle 51 is detected on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the ball firing is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (lighting units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and fluctuating effects (fluctuation). Display) and the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as a continuous notice effect. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, the production random number generation IC 800, and the like.

  The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the player operates the frame button 22, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or the super-reach is performed. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect contents, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the rear image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the sound lamp control device 113, and displays and controls the error command including the type of the error. To device 114. The display control device 114 performs control to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

  Next, the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. The ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 stores at least a variation pattern selection table 222a and a notice effect selection table 222b.

  The variation pattern selection table 222a is based on the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110 by the sound lamp control device 113. The variation content indicated by the variation pattern command (variation time, variation type (reach, miss, etc.)). ) Is used to determine more detailed variation content. As a result, more various variation modes can be determined. Here, one variation mode among a plurality of types is determined by lottery for the rough variation content instructed from the main control device 110.

  The notice effect selection table 222b2 is a table for selecting an aspect of the notice effect executed during the variable display. Here, the notice effect in the present embodiment specifically indicates the degree of expectation according to the type of character displayed in the small area Ds2 (see FIG. 4) on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The production for doing. There is a possibility that one of three types is selected as the character. Specifically, a boy character (see Ds2 in FIG. 4), an elderly character (not shown), and a girl character (not shown) are selected.

  The ratio of the boy character selected when the special symbol lottery is off is higher than that of the other characters, while the ratio of the boy character selected when the jackpot is large is lower than that of the other characters. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the expectation level that is a big hit is lower than when another character is displayed in the small area Ds2 during the variable display.

  On the other hand, the ratio of girls who are selected when the special symbol lottery is off is lower than other characters, while the ratio that is selected when the jackpot is big compared to other characters. Get higher. For this reason, it is possible to expect the player to win a big hit by displaying the girl character in the small area Ds2 during the variable display.

  In addition, the elderly character is configured such that the percentage of selection is higher than that of the girl character in the case of detachment, and the percentage of selection is lower than that of the boy character. In addition, in the case of jackpot, it is configured such that the rate of selection is higher than that of a boy character and the rate of selection is lower than that of a girl character. Thereby, compared with the case where the boy character is displayed, the player can have a sense of expectation for the jackpot. In this way, by changing the type of the notice effect (displayed character) according to whether or not it is a big hit, it is possible to predict the degree of expectation of the big hit from the notice effect. That is, since the lottery result of the special symbol can be predicted from the content of the notice effect before the third symbol is stopped and displayed, it is possible to prevent the player's game from becoming monotonous during the execution of the variable display. (Suppressed). Note that the type of the notice effect is not limited to the type of character displayed in the small area Ds2, and may be arbitrarily determined. For example, a notice effect that changes the back image may be executed, or a notice effect that changes the aspect (eg, size, color, etc.) of the changing third symbol may be executed.

  As shown in FIG. 11, at least the announcement effect selection table 222b1 for jackpot and the announcement effect selection table 222b2 for losing are defined in the announcement effect selection table 222b. The jackpot announcement effect table 222b1 is a data table for selecting the mode of the announcement effect to be executed in the variable display executed when the special symbol lottery is a jackpot, and the losing notice effect selection table 222b2 is a special symbol. It is a data table for selecting the mode of the notice effect performed in the change effect performed when the lottery of is excluded.

  First, the jackpot notice effect selection table 222b1 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 11B, the jackpot notice effect table 222b1 defines the form of the notice effect to be executed for each value of the effect random number. Although the details will be described later, the effect random number is a random number generated by the effect random number generation IC 800 electrically connected to the input / output port 225 of the sound lamp control device 113. That is, the effect random number generation IC 800 can generate a random 8-bit numerical value (0 to 255) as an effect random number.

  As shown in FIG. 11B, the notice effect A is associated with the range of the effect random number “0 to 24”. The notice effect A is a notice effect in which the boy character is displayed in the small area Ds2 (see FIG. 4B). As described above, in the case of the variable display with respect to the jackpot, the boy character is selected. Therefore, when the announcement effect A is selected in the big hit variation, it is possible to give an unexpected feeling that the big hit is achieved despite the low-expected announcement effect. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

  The notice effect B is associated with the range of the effect random number “25 to 99”. The notice effect B is a notice effect in which the old character is displayed. As described above, the ratio selected in the case of the variable display with respect to the jackpot is configured higher than the notice effect A. For this reason, when the notice effect B is displayed, the player can have a sense of expectation for the jackpot. In addition, the notice effect C is associated with the range of the random number for effect “100 to 249”. This notice effect C is a notice effect in a form in which a girl character is displayed, and is a type of notice effect that has the highest ratio selected in the case of a jackpot. For this reason, by displaying the notice effect C, it is possible to make the player have a stronger sense of expectation for the jackpot.

  On the other hand, “re-selection” is associated with the range where the value of the random number for production is “250 to 255”. This “reselection” means to re-execute selection of the notice effect. That is, when the value of the production random number is in the range of “250 to 255”, the production random number is acquired again from the production random number generation IC 800 without determining the type of the announcement production (the production random number is re-generated). get). Then, the re-acquired effect random number and the jackpot notice effect selection table 222b1 are referred to. This “reselection” is repeatedly executed until the value of the effect random number reaches a value (0 to 249) corresponding to one of the notice effect types. That is, when the value of the effect random number acquired from the effect random number generation IC 800 is “250 to 255”, “reselection” is repeatedly executed.

  By associating the re-selection with the range of “250 to 255”, the notice effect is determined only when 250 random numbers for effect of “0 to 249” are obtained. For this reason, the notice effect A is selected when it becomes one of 25 values “0 to 24” out of 250 values “0 to 249”, and the probability thereof is 10% (25/25). 250). Further, the notice effect B is selected when the value of 75 of “25 to 99” is selected from the 250 values of “0 to 249”, and thus the probability is 30% (75 / 250). Further, the notice effect C is selected when the value of any of 150 values “100 to 249” is selected from 250 values “0 to 249”, and therefore the probability is 60% (150 / 250).

  Thus, in this embodiment, 250 values are used for selection of the notice effect among the 8-bit (256 kinds) values that can be generated by the effect random number generation IC 800. In other words, the number of decimal values that are well-separated (that is, 250) can be used for determining the notice effect. Therefore, the probability that each notice effect is selected can be set to a good value (10%, 30%, 60%) (the probability percentage is converted into an integer). This makes it easier for the player to understand the probability that each notice effect will be selected. Further, the developer who designs the probability of the notice effect can set the probability more easily.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 11 (c), the removal notice effect selection table 222b2 will be described. Similar to the above-described winning notice effect selection table 222b1, the detachment notice effect selection table 222b2 is a data table in which the aspect of the notice effect to be executed is defined for each value of the effect random number.

  As shown in FIG. 11C, the range of the production random number is “0 to 149” is associated with the notice production A, and the range of the production random number is “150 to 224” The notice effect B is associated, and the notice effect C is associated with the range of “225 to 249”. Similarly to the jackpot notice effect selection table 222b1, “reselection” is associated with the range of the effect random numbers “250 to 255”.

  For this reason, since the notice effect A is selected when the value of 150 of “0 to 149” is selected from 250 values of “0 to 249”, the probability of selection is 60% ( 150/250). Further, the notice effect B is selected when the value of 75 of “150 to 224” among the 250 values of “0 to 249” is selected, so the probability is 30% (75 / 250). Furthermore, since the notice effect C is selected when any of 25 values “225 to 249” is selected from 250 values “0 to 249”, the probability is 10% (25 / 250). Therefore, in the case of detachment, the notice effect A is most easily selected as the type of the notice effect, and the notice effect C is most difficult to be selected. By providing a difference in the probability of selection, it is possible to make the player predict whether or not a big hit will be made based on the type of the notice effect. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the game from becoming monotonous while the variable display is being executed.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in addition to the effect image (for example, the change effect image) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 in accordance with the change pattern command from the main control device 110, another effect image. When displaying (for example, a notice effect image), it is configured to select from the notice effect selection table 222b for selecting the type of the notice effect to be additionally displayed. By defining the notice effect selection table 222b separately from the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a, it is possible to easily select a notice effect to be displayed in addition to the change effect. If the variation effect mode including the type of the notice effect is defined in the variation pattern selection table 222a, the data amount of the variation pattern selection table 222a increases. For example, when there are 32 types of variation effects and there are three types of announcement effects that can be additionally displayed for each, 96 variations (32 × 3) of variation effects can be displayed for the variation pattern selection table 222a. The type must be specified. On the other hand, if the change pattern table 222a and the notice effect selection table 222b are prepared separately as in the present embodiment, 35 types (32 + 3) of change effects and types of notice effects may be provided. Since it is good, it can prevent (suppress) that the capacity | capacitance of ROM222 increases.

  In the present embodiment, an IC that generates any one of 8 bits (256 values) is employed as the production random number generation IC 800, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, an IC capable of generating a 10-bit (1024 types) value may be employed. In this case, in order to convert the percentage into an integer, 1000 values are used for selection of the notice effect, and when 24 values different from the 1000 values are acquired, the lottery is performed again. Also good. Then, the number of random values (determination values) may be associated with each effect using 10 as the minimum unit. By configuring in this way, the percentage can be converted to an integer, so that it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the probability is easily understood and easy to design. Further, for example, an IC having a bit number smaller than 8 bits (for example, 7 bits) may be employed. In this case, out of 128 random numbers that can be generated by the IC, 100 values may be used for selection of the notice effect, and the remaining 28 values may be associated with the redraw. Also in this case, since the percentage can be converted to an integer, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the probability is easily understood and easy to design.

  Next, the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. In the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113, a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b, a variation start flag 223c, a stop type selection flag 223d, a notice reselection flag 223e, and a notice reselection counter are displayed. 223f, a power-off flag 223y, and other memory area 223z are provided.

  The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and winning information is stored in each of these areas. In the present pachinko machine 10, when the main control device 110 wins a start prize, each value of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-class type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start prize From the above, various information (win / no-go, stop type, variation pattern) obtained when the special symbol corresponding to the start winning is drawn is predicted (estimated) in the main control device 110, and the predicted various information is The main controller 110 notifies the sound lamp controller 113 by a winning information command.

  When the winning information command is received, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts various kinds of information (whether it is successful, stop type, variation pattern) notified by the winning information command, and the winning information is the winning information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth) among the vacant areas of the four areas (first area to fourth area). Is done. In other words, the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored in the area having the smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the winning that is oldest in time is stored in the first area.

  The special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is a variation effect (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), like the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110. Thus, the counter is a counter that counts up to four times the number of balls to be held (the number of standby times) of the fluctuating effects held in the main controller 110.

  As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 counts the number of held balls based on the number of held balls command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the number of held balls is managed by the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b. It has become.

  Specifically, in the main controller 110, when the number of held balls for variation display is added by entering the first entrance 64, or in the main controller 110, variation display in a special symbol is executed. When the number of reserved balls is subtracted, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c after addition or after subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

  When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 from the reserved ball number command, Stored in the symbol holding ball number counter 223b (see S1308 in FIG. 31). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b in accordance with the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the special symbol reserved ball number counter of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with 203c.

  The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is used to display the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to receiving the reserved ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the reserved ball number indicated by the command in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and also stores the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b after the storage. In order to notify the display controller 114 of this value, a display reserved ball number command is transmitted to the display controller 114.

  When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball number command, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is changed in synchronization with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. Accordingly, the number of reserved ball numbers displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed in synchronization with the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variation display is held.

  The variation start flag 223c is turned on when a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1302 in FIG. 31), and is turned off when variation display is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S1402 in FIG. 32). When the fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on, a display fluctuation pattern command is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1202) of the main process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variation effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223d is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S1305 in FIG. 31), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S1408 in FIG. 32). When the stop type selection flag 223d is turned on, the stop type is determined based on the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (a jackpot type in the case of a jackpot).

  The notice reselection flag 223e is a flag indicating whether or not “reselection” has been determined from the notice effect selection table 222b. If the notice reselection flag 223e is on, it means that “reselection” is determined from the notice effect selection table 222b (no notice effect is determined). If it is off, “reselection” is set. This means that it has not been decided (the notice effect has been decided). The initial value of the notice reselection flag 223e is set to off, and “reselection” is determined from the notice effect selection table 222b in the notice effect selection process (see FIG. 33) for selecting the type of the notice effect. Is set to ON (see S1506 in FIG. 33). Also, in the notice reselection process (see FIG. 34), when any notice effect (notice effects AC) is determined or “reselect” is determined ten times or more in succession, it is set to OFF. (See S1613 in FIG. 34). When “reselection” is determined from the notice effect selection table 222b by referring to the notice reselection flag 223e, the notice effect is reselected (re-lottery) in the notice reselection process (see FIG. 34). Can be executed.

  The notice reselection counter 223f is a counter for counting the number of times that the process of selecting the type of notice effect again (re-drawing) is continued. Here, the process of re-drawing the notice effect is to acquire a new random value (determination value) from the effect random number generation IC 800 based on the determination of “re-selection” from the notice effect selection table 222b. This is a process for reselecting the type of the notice effect, and is executed in the notice reselection process (see FIG. 34). In the present embodiment, when the process of re-drawing the type of the notice effect is continued a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) or more, the process of re-drawing is discontinued, and the normal notice effect (the notice effects A to C) It is configured to execute different specific notice effects (special notice effects). Thereby, it is possible to prevent (suppress) that the re-lottery continues to be selected endlessly and the type of the notice effect is not determined. Therefore, any one of the notice effects can be reliably displayed at the display timing of the notice effect.

  The initial value of the notice reselection counter 223f is set to 0, and is incremented by one each time the notice reselection process (see FIG. 34) is executed again for the process of redrawing the type of the notice effect. S1607). In the notice reselection process (see FIG. 34), any notice effect (notice effects A to C) is determined or “reselection” is determined continuously ten times or more, and a specific notice effect ( It is initialized to 0 when the jackpot confirmation notice effect and the jackpot expectation degree notice effect are set (see S1612 in FIG. 34).

  The power-off flag 223y is a flag used to determine whether or not an instantaneous power failure has occurred. The power-off flag 223y is set to ON before receiving a power-off command from the main controller 110 and executing the power-off process (see S1216 in FIG. 30). After that, since the RAM 223 is a volatile memory, all the information in the RAM 223 disappears after a predetermined time (100 milliseconds). Therefore, in the start-up process (FIG. 29) of the sound lamp control device 113, when the power-off flag 223y is on (see 1108 in FIG. 29: Yes), a certain time has elapsed after the power-off flag 223y is set on. This is a case where the voice lamp control device 113 starts up before (100 milliseconds) elapses, that is, when there is an instantaneous power failure. In this case, all the information in the RAM 223 is not erased, and unnecessary information (or information that has become incomplete because only a part of the information has disappeared) remains in the work area of the RAM 223. In some cases, information on the work area in the RAM 223 is cleared (see S1109 in FIG. 29). As a result, the processing is not executed based on unnecessary (or incomplete) information, so that each processing of the sound lamp control device 113 can be normally operated.

  The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-described data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values used by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113.

  In addition, the RAM 223 has a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing commands received from the main controller 110 until processing corresponding to the commands is performed, an elapsed time timer for measuring the production time, and the like. doing. Note that the command storage area includes a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 31) of the audio lamp processing device 113 is executed, the first stored command is read out of the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area. The command is analyzed and processing corresponding to the command is performed. In addition, the clock timer counts an elapsed time after the production such as the variation production is started. Based on the elapsed time counted by the timekeeping timer, various controls (such as setting of operations of various kinds of articles and development of effects) are performed.

  Next, the details of the production random number generation IC 800 electrically connected to the input / output port 225 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. The effect random number generation IC 800 is an IC for generating a determination value (random value) used for a predetermined determination (determination of the type of the notice effect to be displayed) executed in the sound lamp control device 113. Since the effect random number generation IC 800 can generate a value in the range of 8 bits (0 to 255) at random each time, the determination result can also be random. Therefore, since the displayed notice effect can be determined at random, it is difficult to predict the displayed notice effect. Therefore, an unexpected game can be provided.

  The effect random number generation IC 800 stores a random number generation unit for generating a random value (random value) within a range of 8 bits (0 to 255), and a random value generated by the random number generation unit. And at least a random number storage unit. The random number generation unit includes a random pulse generation circuit (RPG) that generates a pulse signal at random time intervals, and measures the time interval of the pulse signal generated by the RPG to obtain 8 bits (1 byte). Is stored in the random number storage unit. The random number generation circuit is a specification that can generate, for example, random values for 200 megabytes per second (two random values per 10 μs). That is, the random number value can be updated at a time interval shorter than the time interval at which the process for determining the notice effect is executed. More specifically, when the “reselection” is determined from the notice effect selection table 222b, the sound lamp control device 113 produces an effect in the notice reselection process (see FIG. 34) of the main process (see FIG. 30). A new random number value is acquired from the random number generation IC 800 and the lottery of the notice effect is performed again. The notice lottery re-lottery continues to be executed at 1-millisecond intervals as long as “re-select” is selected from the notice effect selection table 222b. During this period, one random number value is acquired. On the other hand, since the random number generator is a specification that can generate two random values per 10 μs, even if “reselect” is selected continuously, a new random value is used every time the notice effect is redrawn. Lottery (reselection) can be executed. Therefore, since the displayed notice effect can be determined at random, it is difficult to predict the displayed notice effect. Therefore, an unexpected game can be provided.

  The random number storage unit is a FIFO (First In First Out) type storage device that stores a random number generated by a random number generation circuit with a predetermined number (for example, 16) as an upper limit. The sound lamp control device 113 can read the random number value stored in the random number storage unit and use it for the determination of the type of the notice effect. As described above, since the random number storage unit is a FIFO storage device, when the voice lamp control device 113 instructs the random number value to be read, the random number stored at the oldest time is stored in the voice lamp. Output to the control device 113. The read (output) random number value is discarded from the random number storage unit. As a result, every time when the reading of the random number value is instructed from the sound lamp control device 113, the random number value generated at a different timing can be output from the random number storage unit, so that the random number value is set to a more random value. Can do.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 displays the variation of the third symbol (variation). Effect) and continuous notice effect. Details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The power supply device 115 is a RAM provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, etc., and a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 5). And an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 25).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 5) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the sound lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, work RAM 233, character ROM 234, and image controller 237 via the bus line 240. . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241. A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  It should be noted that the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if it is a different model that has different lottery probabilities for special symbol jackpots or different number of prize balls to be paid out for one special symbol jackpot. Since there are models having the same specifications, the display control device 114 is made a common part to reduce costs.

  In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to receive a system reset from the power supply device 115 immediately after power-on (including power recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter). When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the pointer value designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine. Is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As will be described in detail later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. As a result, not only image data but also a control program or the like can be sufficiently stored. If a control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the reading speed becomes slow particularly when random access is performed. For example, in the case of reading data continuously arranged on a plurality of pages, the data on the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time for the data to be output. Further, when reading non-continuous data, a long time is required every time the data is read. As described above, since the NAND flash memory is slow in reading, if the MPU 231 directly reads the control program from the character ROM 234 and executes various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. May occur, and even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. Store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. As will be described later, the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), and data is read and written at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, it is possible to maintain high processing performance in the display control device 114, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed in the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after canceling the system reset, and transfers the control program stored in a second program storage area 234a1 (to be described later) of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 converts image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 (to be described later) of the character ROM 234 into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237, Transfer to normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234. Most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81 are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storing, and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

  In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 in a state where a lot of image data is stored in the character storage area 234a2. Thus, the control program and fixed value data are provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. Are output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) are generated when data is written, or defective data blocks in which data cannot be written are generated. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and is known so that data is read from and written to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding a defective data block. Performs data address conversion.

  Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is based on the erroneous data. Thus, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

  Further, since the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data block, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the block address position. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

  The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b is for one page including data corresponding to the designated address (for example, 2 kilobytes). It is determined whether or not the data is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, data for one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. To do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. Thereby, for example, the ROM controller 234b outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or is designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the designated address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is set to the other The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading out the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely small capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND flash memory 234a. ). In the NOR type ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, a program that is not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. The MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, the display control device 114 can be in a state where various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after releasing the system reset within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in the boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, instructions for 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to “0000H” by hardware and designates the address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a for the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is designated on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d is transferred to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231.

  When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and sends the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. Specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 reads from the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

  In this embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after canceling the system reset in the boot program are obtained from the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing is in the following reason. In other words, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time for data to be output after the address is specified when reading the first page of data. There's a problem.

  When all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read out data for one page including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time from reading to setting to the buffer RAM 234c. It takes a lot of waiting time to receive the code Therefore, since the time required for starting the MPU 231 becomes longer, as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR-type ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d in the boot program. Thus, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately loads the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d into the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, and can activate the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  The boot program is a control program other than the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The program storage area of the work RAM 233 stores fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to 233a and data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released, in the first program storage area 234d1. While using a bank different from the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a.

  Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as “0000H”. In response to this, when the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a in accordance with the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, it is not necessary to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 again in the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, so that the time related to the boot process can be shortened.

  When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. Thus, after the system reset is released, when the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the first predetermined storage area 233a. Set to the address.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1. Then, various processes are executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at a high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and programmed to set the instruction pointer 231a with the first address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Thereby, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. The remaining boot program included in the control program is executed.

  In this remaining boot program, the remaining control program that has not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table and a transfer data table described later) that are used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, an initialization process (see S1702 in FIG. 35) executed after the end of the boot process (see S1701 in FIG. 35) stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to

  By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address. Thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

  Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can read out the control program from the work RAM constituted by the DRAM having a high reading speed and perform various controls. Accordingly, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released without storing the entire boot program in the NOR-type ROM 234d. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR-type ROM 234d, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time. Can do.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 16), which will be described later, transmitted from the MPU 231, and either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, which will be described later. The image drawn in the buffer is developed, and the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame on the image display time for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment). Parallel processing in

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when drawing processing of an image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V-interrupt signal, the MPU 231 executes a V-interrupt process (see FIG. 37B) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for the image for the next one frame, and also executes a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to display the image previously developed by the drawing.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not finished, so that drawing of a new image is started in the middle of drawing the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The image drawing is performed using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

  Here, the NAND flash memory facilitates an increase in the capacity of the ROM, while the reading speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws an image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed during image drawing. The time required for the readout can be omitted, and the image drawn can be immediately displayed and the image drawn on the third symbol display device 81 can be displayed.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 resident image data of frequently displayed images or image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Further, when the image is drawn using the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 is necessary for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for image drawing, but at the time of image drawing, the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used. Therefore, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured as described above, and the time required for the reading can be omitted. Therefore, it is possible to immediately draw the image and display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so that it is not necessary to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a configured by an SRAM of 132 kilobytes that is a capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  In the image data transfer instruction that the MPU 231 performs to the image controller 237 according to the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data to be transferred is used. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and start of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) An address is included. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 according to the various information of the transfer instruction, temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a, and the buffer RAM 237a when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used. Is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. The process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction is transferred.

  Thus, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can do. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process. It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being in time.

  In addition, since the image controller 237 transfers image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and third symbol display. The period that is not used for the display process on the device 81 can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is kept overwritten without being overwritten during power-on, and the main image area 235a, the back image area 235c, and the character symbol area when the power is turned on. 235e and an error message image area 235f, at least a power-on variation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

  The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from when the power is turned on until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This area stores the corresponding data. Further, in the power-on variation image area 235b, a game is started by the player while the main image at power-on is displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, and the entrance to the first entrance 64 is detected. In this case, the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image that displays the lottery result performed in the main controller 110 by the variation effect is stored.

  When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S1703 and S1704 in FIG. 35).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 13, a power-on variation image will be described. FIG. 13 shows that the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234 immediately after the display control device 114 is turned on. It is explanatory drawing explaining a time image.

  The display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area 235b immediately after the power is turned on. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to use the power-on main image shown in FIG. The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  At this time, when the display variation pattern command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110, which is a command to start variation, the display control device 114 displays the state shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 13, on the display screen of the main image when power is turned on, the fluctuation image at the time of power-on of the symbol “◯” is located at the lower right position toward the screen, and as shown in FIG. A “×” symbol power-on variation image is repeatedly displayed alternately during the variation period at the same position as the symbol. Then, the lottery performed in the main control device 110 from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110. The result is judged, and if it is “special symbol jackpot”, the image shown in FIG. 13 (b) is displayed for a certain period of time after stopping the changing effect, and if it is “out of special symbol”, it is shown in FIG. 13 (c). The displayed image is displayed for a certain period after the change effect is stopped.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a when the power is turned on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw main image when power is turned on. Thus, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall related person can confirm the main image at the time of power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident over time from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image when the power is turned on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image at the time of power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Can do.

  Also, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, the main image at power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts operating without any problem when the power is turned on. In addition, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed as the character ROM 234.

  In addition, when the player starts playing while the main image at the time of power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and a ball is detected in the first entrance ball 64, the fluctuation image area at the time of power-on The power-on variation image is drawn using image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. 13B and 13C are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Thus, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237. Thereby, a simple variation effect can be performed using the variation image at power-on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery is surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on.

  Further, when the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the varying effect image at power-on is already resident in the power-on varying image area 235b. When a ball is detected in the first entrance sphere 64 while the hour main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  Returning to FIG. 12, the description will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, with reference to FIG. 14, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c among the back images and the back images will be described. FIG. 14 is an explanatory diagram for explaining two types of back images and a range of back images stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each back image. FIG. 14B shows the rear surface A corresponding to the “city stage” and the rear surface B corresponding to the “empty stage”. FIG. 15 shows the rear surface C corresponding to the “island stage”.

  As shown in FIG. 14, the rear image corresponding to each of the rear surfaces A and B is prepared in the character ROM 234 as an image that is longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 draws an image so that the back image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the image from left to right in the horizontal direction.

  The images prepared on the rear surfaces A and B (hereinafter referred to as “scroll images”) are configured such that the rear images are continuous at positions a and c. The image between the position c and the position d and the image between the position a and the position a ′ are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and an image between the position c and the position d. Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and when the image between the position a and the position a ′ is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display region, the third symbol display device 81 is smoothly displayed. The back image is scrolled and displayed in a simple connection.

  When the player operates the frame button 22 to change the stage to “city stage” or “empty stage”, the MPU 231 first displays the initial position of the display area between position a and position a ′ of the corresponding back image. The image controller 237 is controlled so that the image at the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, with the passage of time, the display area is moved from the left to the right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When the area reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is displayed again on the third symbol display device 81 as the image from the position a to the position a ′. Therefore, on the third symbol display device 81, the image between the positions a to c can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with smooth connection so as to flow toward the left.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 15, the back image on the back C is the third pattern in the order of (a) → (b) → (c) → (a) →. It is displayed on the display device 81. Specifically, the back C is the third pattern in a state where the image of the mountain towering over the island, the image of the sandy beach spreading at the foot of the mountain, and the image of the sea surrounding the island are fixed. It is displayed on the display device 81. On the other hand, the color of the sky image spreading over the mountain changes over time.

  When the stage is changed to the “island stage” by the player operating the frame button 22, the rear image shown in FIG. 15A is displayed as the initial rear image of the rear C. In the rear image shown in FIG. 15A, an orange sky indicating the morning glow is displayed. Then, with the passage of time, the color of the sky gradually changes from orange to vivid blue, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the rear image shown in FIG. 15B is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 15B, a bright blue sky indicating the daytime is displayed. Next, with the passage of time, the color of the sky gradually changes from bright blue to black, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the rear image shown in FIG. 15C is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 15C, a black sky indicating night is displayed. After that, as the time passes, the color of the sky gradually begins to white from black and then changes to orange. Then, after a predetermined time has elapsed, the back image shown in FIG. 15A is displayed again, and the back images shown in FIGS. 15A to 15C are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 again.

  Next, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c in each back image will be described. As shown in FIG. 14A, the rear surface A corresponding to the city stage which is the initial stage is the entire rear surface A, that is, all the image data corresponding to the position a to the position d is the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235. It is stored in the image area 235c. Usually, the game is often performed without changing the stage while the city stage as the initial stage is displayed, so all the image data of the back A corresponding to the city stage displayed frequently is displayed in the back image area. By making it resident in 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced, and the load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 14B, the rear surface B corresponding to the empty stage stores only image data corresponding to the partial area of the rear surface, that is, the image between the position a and the position b. Is stored in the rear image area 235c. Further, the back C corresponding to the island stage includes FIG. 15A, and the image data corresponding to the back image between FIGS. 15A and 15B excluding FIG. Are stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and made resident.

  Here, since the operation of the frame button 22 performed by the player to change the stage is performed at an arbitrary timing based on the player's intention, the frame button 22 is operated at an arbitrary timing. In order to immediately change the rear image, it is ideal that the entire range of image data for all the rear images is resident in the resident video RAM 235. A large-capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image displayed first when the stage is changed is set to the range from the position a to the position a ′ (or the range from FIGS. 13A to 13B). ) And the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b including the initial position (or the image between FIGS. 13A to 13B) is displayed as the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the resident video RAM 235 can be used when the stage is changed at an arbitrary timing by the player operating the frame button 22. By using the image data resident in the back image area 235c, the initial position of the back surface B is immediately displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81. So it can also can be displayed while changing the scrolling display or color over time. Further, since only the image data corresponding to a partial range of images is stored for the back surface B, an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

  On the back B, after the image at the initial position is displayed, the range from the position a to the position b is scrolled from the left to the right using the image data resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. In the meantime, the range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b ′ to the position d can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. As a result, the image data from the position b ′ to the position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while the range from the position a to the position b is scrolled. Therefore, the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 is stored. Using the image data corresponding to the back image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from the position b ′ to the position d is scrolled by using the image data corresponding to the back image stored without delay. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

  Similarly, after the image at the initial position is displayed on the rear surface C, the images shown in FIGS. 15A to 15B are displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. 15 (a) so that the image data of the images corresponding to FIGS. 15 (b) to 15 (c) and FIGS. 15 (c) to (a) can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. The range of ~ (b) is set. As a result, the image data corresponding to the images of FIGS. 15B to 15C and FIGS. 15C to 15A are used for normal use while the images of FIGS. 15A to 15B are displayed. Since it can be transferred to the video RAM 236, the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 is used to display the images of FIGS. The images shown in FIGS. 15B to 15C and FIGS. 15C to 15A are sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the elapse of time by using the image data corresponding to the rear image thus made. be able to.

  Note that on the back surface B and the back surface C, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in a sub-area dedicated to the back image provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 12) of the normal video RAM 236. As a result, the back image data stored in the sub-area dedicated to the back image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the back image can be displayed reliably.

  Further, on the back surface B, the image data stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 are images corresponding to images between the position b ′ and the position b. Duplicate data is stored. Under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video By displaying the image from the position b ′ on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the back image is scrolled and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with smooth connection. ing.

  Further, the MPU 231 uses the image data of the normal video RAM 236 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between the position c and the position d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. The MPU 231 uses the image data in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to control the image controller 237 so that an image between the position a and the position a ′ is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. To do. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with smooth connection so that the image between the positions a to c flows in the left direction.

  Returning to FIG. 12, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-described ten kinds of main symbols (see FIG. 4) with the numbers “0” to “9” as the third symbols are resident. As a result, when changing effects are performed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read out image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the 3rd symbol display device 81 Fluctuation production can be started quickly. Therefore, after the entrance to the first entrance 64 has occurred, the variation effect is immediately started in the third symbol display device 81, even though the variation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state that is not performed.

  In addition, in the third symbol area 235d, as a main symbol not numbered "0" to "9", a main symbol composed of a rear symbol such as a wooden box, a character such as a rear symbol and a planer, furoshiki, helmet, etc. The image data corresponding to the main symbol consisting of the attached symbol imitating the image is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start prize is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the one variation effect was stopped. It is done. Thus, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demo state by visually recognizing the main symbols without numerals from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

  The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters such as “boy”, “old man”, and “girl” are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these characters is displayed in the character symbol area 235e. By being resident, the display control device 114 does not newly read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 when changing the character design based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, but for resident use. A predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237 by reading image data resident in advance in the character symbol area 235e of the video RAM 235. Thereby, since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used for the character ROM 234, the character design can be changed immediately.

  The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. The display controller 114 is notified by an error command. Further, when the occurrence of other errors is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When receiving an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the viewpoint of preventing the player's fraud and protecting the player against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since the image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in the error message image area 235f in advance, the display control device 114 performs the error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. This eliminates the need to sequentially read out image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after the error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

  The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of subareas, and the type of image data stored in each subarea is predetermined for each subarea.

  The MPU 231 transmits image data required for subsequent image drawing out of the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the sub-areas provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 from the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a specified sub-area designated in the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The image data transfer instruction is performed when the MPU 231 includes transfer data information in a later-described drawing list that instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can perform an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

  The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for expanding an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn in accordance with an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the frame buffers of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c. While the image is developed and the image is developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information of one frame previously developed from the other frame buffer is read, and the third symbol display device 81 is read together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes a process for displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as the frame buffers, the image controller 237 can simultaneously develop an image for one frame drawn in one of the frame buffers. The first frame image developed from the other frame buffer can be read out, and the read one frame image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  A frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 include an image drawing process for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to be completed, the MPU 231 designates one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c alternately.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame, and When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information is read out. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. The

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. The Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously display an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing an image for one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing a control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. Composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counter 233h, and an effect timing storage area. 233i, stored image data determination flag 233j, drawing target buffer flag 233k, rear image change flag 233w, rear image determination flag 233x, demo display flag 233y, and final display flag 233z.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in this program storage area 233a. When all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 executes various controls using the control program stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated effects.

  The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 over time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and display data. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and transfer data table that defines transfer timing among image data used in one effect displayed by the table.

  These data tables are normally stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234. According to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. When all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device Using 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

  Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a change effect and an opening effect are provided. Display data tables corresponding to round effects, ending effects, and demonstration effects are prepared.

  The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the sound lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the variation effect stop type is also received. For example, when a variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out, the stop symbol indicating the outage is finally stopped and displayed, while the stop type of the variation effect is a jackpot A, a jackpot B If it is any of these, the stop symbol which shows each jackpot will be stop-displayed finally. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

  The opening effect is an effect for informing the player that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to the special gaming state from now on, and the specific winning opening 65a that is normally closed will be repeatedly opened. This is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started. The ending effect is an effect for notifying the player of the end of the special game state.

  As described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect associated with the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the one variation effect was stopped. The third symbol composed of the main symbols not numbered “0” to “9” is stopped and displayed, and only the back image changes. If a demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a player or a hall-related person can recognize that no game is being played in the pachinko machine 10.

  In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to each of the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect is stored. Further, the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effects, has 32 tables in total for one variation effect pattern, if there are 32 variable effect patterns to be set.

  Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table in the display data table. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time for displaying an image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) is represented as one unit. The content (drawing content) of an image for one frame is defined in detail.

  The drawing content specifies the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, and translucency according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for drawing the sprite on the third symbol display device 81, such as value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

  The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite is to be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed in an enlarged size than the standard size. If the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is reduced in size than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite. The higher the translucency value, the more the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α blending information is information for specifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when the designated sprite is drawn.

  In the variable display data table, as a drawing content for one frame defined corresponding to each address, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Light in the image. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of characters, characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. Note that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the contents to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the back image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information Since it is constant, only the back surface type, which is information for specifying the back image type, is defined in the variable display data table. This back surface type indicates whether to display any of the back surfaces A to C corresponding to the stage selected by the player (any one of the “city stage”, “empty stage”, and “island stage”), or the back surface A to C. Information specifying whether to display a back image different from C is described. The back surface type also includes information specifying which back image to display when specifying that a back image different from the back surfaces A to C is displayed.

  When the MPU 231 specifies that any one of the back surfaces A to C is displayed according to the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage designated by the player among the back surfaces A to C as the drawing target. In addition, the range of the rear image to be displayed with respect to the frame is specified as time elapses. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back surfaces A to C, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back surface type.

  In the present embodiment, the case where only the back surface type is defined as the rendering content of the back image in the display data table will be described, but instead, the back surface type and which range of the back image corresponding to the back surface type is described. Position information indicating whether or not should be displayed may be defined. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time after the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time from the start of image drawing (or display on the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 displayed the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when drawing of the image (or display on the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. The position is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or display on the third symbol display device 81) is started.

  Further, the position information includes information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81 according to the rear surface type). May indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start of display, and the type information of the position information (for example, the range of the range corresponding to the initial position) This is information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or display on the third symbol display device 81) was started. May be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the back image to be displayed is stored.

  In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers assigned to the third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed one time before and the variation effect performed this time. This is because it changes depending on the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from when the change is started until a predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop symbol of the change effect performed immediately before is described. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the fluctuation, an offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113. Enter information. Thereby, the variation effect can be stopped with the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since a unique number is attached to each 3rd symbol, the 3rd symbol is displayed as a variation symbol in the previous variation effect or a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110. It is possible to identify the third symbol to be displayed easily from the offset information by managing the offset information with the number attached to the symbol and expressing the offset information by the difference between the digits attached to each third symbol.

  Also, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at a high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is changed to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect currently performed. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is variably displayed at a high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player, and during that time, the symbol of the change effect that was performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect currently being performed, even if the continuity of the number 3 symbol is interrupted, the player will not recognize the discontinuity of the number continuity be able to.

  “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H” that is the top address of the display data table, and the data table is included in the last address of the display data table (“02F0H” in the example of FIG. 16). "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which “Start” information is described and the address in which “End” information is described, the rendering contents corresponding to the rendering mode to be specified in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one. In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 18) described later is created. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order defined in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as defined in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like, The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by simply replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate, instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231. .

  Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated each time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed as in the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. Since a large load is required for starting up and executing a complicated and enormous program, the processing capability of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a possibility that the diversification of controllable effect images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  Also, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer corresponding to the effect mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is displayed frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason that the pachinko machine 10 can create is that an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance is determined based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be realized can be realized for the first time based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is a configuration that determines in advance the presentation mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

  Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared in correspondence with the display data table prepared for each presentation. As described above, the transfer data table is resident among the sprite image data used in the presentation specified in the display data table. Transfer data information and transfer timing for transferring image data not resident in the video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 are defined.

  If all the sprite image data used in the production defined in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Thereby, an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address specified in the display data table, and transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as “transfer target image data”) to be transferred at the time indicated by the address. (Addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 17 correspond). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to be transferred at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to be transferred corresponding to the address. Is defined (corresponding to the address “0002H” in FIG. 17).

  As the transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are stored. Is included.

  Note that “0000H”, which is the start address of the transfer data table, describes “Start” information indicating the start of the data table, similarly to the display data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 17, “02F0H”) describes “End” information indicating the end of the data table. For each address between the address “0000H” in which “Start” information is described and the address in which “End” information is described, transfer data information of transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table Is described.

  When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, the display data table is displayed. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, every time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f are specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 18) described later is created. In addition, transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is created in the created drawing list. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 15, when the pointer 233 f is “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates transfer data information defined for the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. In addition to the drawing list, the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is “0002H”, Null data is defined in the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, so it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start transfer, and is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process.

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 displays data according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the sprite image data used in the display data table is The character ROM 234 can be reliably transferred to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and transfers image data to be transferred that should start transfer at the time indicated by the address corresponding to the address defined in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, the image data is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of the predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, a variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed. be able to.

  The simple image display flag 233c indicates whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image) shown in FIGS. 13 (a) to 13 (c) on the third symbol display device 81. It is a flag to show. This simple image display flag 233c is displayed after image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. The main process (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 231 is set to ON (see S1705 in FIG. 35). Then, when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to off (see S3405 in FIG. 47B).

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 every time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S2001 in FIG. 37B). When the image display flag 233c is on, a simple command determination process (see S2008 in FIG. 37B) and a simple display setting process (see FIG. 37) so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 37 (b) S2009) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is OFF, the command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 38 to 43) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 44 to 46) are executed.

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 during the V interrupt process (see S3301 in FIG. 47A), and the simple image display flag 233c is on. Since there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235, a resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 47B) for transferring the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is executed. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, a normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 48) for transferring image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. After selecting, the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f one by one, and the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 18), which describes the contents of image drawing instructions for, is generated. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

  The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f one by one, and based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image to the image controller 237 is displayed frame by frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 18), which will be described later, describing the drawing instruction content is generated. Thereby, the 3rd symbol display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table.

  The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in accordance with a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. Is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. Store in the data table buffer 233e. When all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  Then, the MPU 231 defines transfer data information of image data to be transferred specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If this is the case (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is stored in a drawing list (see FIG. 16), which will be described later, describing the image drawing instruction contents for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

  Thereby, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table, which is necessary for drawing the sprite. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233f is an address at which transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data is to be acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. It is for designating. The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 as the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds from the image controller 237 completing the drawing process of the image for one frame (FIG. 37B). ) (See S2003)), pointer update processing (see S3005 in FIG. 44) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list to be described later (Refer to FIG. 18), transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data Add information to the created drawing list.

  Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed simply by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, a variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341.

  Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is displayed before drawing of a predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 that is used in the above drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructed to 237.

  Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame. As shown in FIG. 16, the back image used for the image of one frame, the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 1). Symbol (Effect 1, Effect 2,...), Character (Character 1, Character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, Reserved ball number symbol 2,..., Error For each sprite (design), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. In the drawing list, transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is also described.

  Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, The image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. The standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and translucency according to the translucency value According to the α blending information, synthesis processing with other sprites, color tone correction processing according to the color information, and filtering processing according to the method specified by the information according to the filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. The drawn image is developed by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 displays the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the contents of the other image to be drawn (for example, the holding ball number symbol for displaying the holding ball number symbol). Generate detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw an image for one frame based on images and warning images that notify the occurrence of errors. Create a drawing list by rearranging.

  Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Is generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed. Thus, it is possible to immediately specify the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored, and easily include such information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  In addition, the MPU 231 defines other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite in the display data table. Copy the information as it is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the order of the sprites to be arranged on the back side from the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and displays detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is first described, then the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2,...), Character. Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, reserved ball number symbol 2,..., Error symbol).

  The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and develops the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  In addition, when the transfer data information is described at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transfers the transfer data information (the character storing the transfer target image data). The storage source head address and the storage source last address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination head address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a in which the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 reads an image from a predetermined area (area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The time counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating the production effect time displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds).

  Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing and display processes for one frame are completed, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 (FIG. 37 (b)). Each time the display setting process (see) is executed, the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S3007 in FIG. 44). As a result, when the value of the time counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is ended, and performs it in accordance with the end of the effect. Various processes to be performed are executed.

  The effect timing storage area 233i displays the timing (value of the pointer 233f) for displaying the notice effect (notice effects A to C, jackpot confirmed notice effect, jackpot expectation large notice effect) and the special notice effect for each variation pattern type. This is an area for storing the timing (value of the pointer 233f). In this embodiment, when setting a notice effect or a special notice effect, the setting is performed so that the notice effect or the special notice effect is displayed at the timing (value of the pointer 233f) defined in the effect timing storage area 233i.

  Here, a method for setting the notice effect in the display control device 114 will be described in detail. In the present embodiment, a notice effect data table that defines display contents for each type of notice effect for each frame is stored in the data table storage area 233b separately from the variable display data table and the like. When a display notice effect command for notifying the type of the notice effect is notified from the audio lamp control device 113, the notice effect data table corresponding to the notified command and the display data table buffer 233d at that time are displayed. The variable display data table set for the data is synthesized. When synthesizing, the display contents specified in the notice effect data table are displayed for each address after the address (value of pointer 233f) corresponding to the start timing of the notice effect specified in the effect timing storage area 233i. to add. That is, the display contents after the start timing of the notice effect are defined for each elapsed time in the notice effect data table. By configuring in this way, the data table storage area 233b can be used more efficiently than in the case where addresses for all variable times are prepared in the notice effect data table.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233k is a frame buffer for developing an image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). When the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S3502 in FIG. 49).

  As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for developing an image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out previously developed drawing image information from a frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing processing, and outputs the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated when the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the rendering target buffer flag 233k, that is, when the value is “0”, it is set to “1”, and when it is “1”, it is set to “0”. Is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted. In addition, the drawing list is transmitted by a V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed. This is performed each time the process drawing process (see S2006 in FIG. 37B) is executed.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame, and When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information is read out. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. The

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. The Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously display an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing an image for one frame.

  The back image change flag 233w is a flag for determining whether or not to change the type of the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. If the back image change flag 233w is on, it means that the type of the back image is changed, and if it is off, it means that no change is made. The rear image change flag 233w is set to ON when a rear image change command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received (see S2801 in FIG. 43A). The rear image change flag 233w is referred to in the normal image transfer setting process (see S3509 in FIG. 48), and is set to off when the rear image change process is executed (see S3510 in FIG. 48). Thereby, the back image corresponding to the back image change command and the effect mode change command received from the sound lamp control device 113 can be displayed.

  The back image discrimination flag 233x is a flag indicating the set back image type. This flag is composed of, for example, 1 byte, and each back surface type is associated with each bit. If any bit of the back image discrimination flag 233x is on, it means that the back surface type corresponding to the on bit is set as the current back surface type. For example, if the 0th bit of the back image discrimination flag 233x is on, it means that the back A is set. When the rear image discrimination flag 233x receives a rear image change command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, the bit corresponding to the rear image notified by the command is set to ON (S2802 in FIG. 43). reference). At this time, all other bits are set off. With this back image discrimination flag 233x, the currently set back surface type can be easily specified.

  The demonstration display flag 233y is a flag indicating whether or not a demonstration effect is being performed. If this demo display flag 233y is on, it means that the demonstration is being performed, and if it is off, it means that the demonstration is not being performed. The demo display flag 233y is set to ON when the demo display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 44) (see S3021 in FIG. 44). When another display data table is set for the display data table buffer 233d, it is set to OFF (S2206 in FIG. 39A, S2405 in FIG. 40, S2505 in FIG. 41A, FIG. 41B). ) S2605 and S2705 of FIG. 42). With this demonstration display flag 233y, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the demonstration is currently being performed.

  The confirmed display flag 233z is a flag indicating whether or not a confirmed display effect is being executed. Here, the confirmed display effect indicates an effect in which the stop symbol is stopped and displayed (determined display) for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) after the variation pattern. If the fixed display flag 233z is on, it means that the fixed display effect is being performed, and if it is off, it means that the fixed display effect is not being performed. The confirmed display flag 233z is set to ON when the confirmed display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d during the display setting process (see FIG. 44) (S3014 in FIG. 44). When another display data table is set for the display data table buffer 233d, it is set to OFF (S2206 in FIG. 39A, S2405 in FIG. 40, S2505 in FIG. 41A, FIG. 41B). ) S2605 and S2705 of FIG. 42). With the confirmation display flag 233z, it can be easily determined whether or not the present is in the confirmation display effect.

<Regarding Control Processing of Main Controller in First Embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 19 to 28. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, and a timer that is periodically started (at intervals of 2 milliseconds in the present embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are described first, and then the startup process And the main process will be described.

  FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interruption process is a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds, for example. In the timer interruption process, first, reading process of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (256 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (256 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, 1 is added to each of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per-random number counter C4, and these counter values are the maximum values (in this embodiment, When reaching 256, 128, 128, 256), respectively, they are cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Next, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104). A start winning process associated with winning (start winning) at the first entrance 64 is executed (S105). Details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After executing the start winning process, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the through gate passing process accompanying the passing of the ball in the through gate 67 is executed. (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation process and the through gate passing process will be described later with reference to FIGS. After executing the through gate passing process, the firing control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. In the launch control process, the ball is fired on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. Is a process for determining ON / OFF of. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch a sphere when the launch of the sphere is on.

  Next, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19), and the special symbol (first symbol) variation display or the third symbol display device performed in the first symbol display device 37. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol, etc. performed in 81.

  In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present symbol is a special symbol jackpot (S201). During the special symbol jackpot, the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the special symbol jackpot Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S201: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  If the special symbol is not big hit (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number N of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is greater than 0 (S204), and if the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is 0 (S204: No), this process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is decremented by 1 (S205) and is changed by calculation. A reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is set (S206). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S901) of a main process (see FIG. 27) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. .

  After setting the reserved ball number command by the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, a process of sequentially shifting data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. Shift data. After the data is shifted, a special symbol variation start process for starting variation display on the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S208). The special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S209). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time. If it has not elapsed (S209: No), this processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S209, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S209: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S210). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a special symbol variation start process (S208) described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol variation start process is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. More specifically, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined according to the value of the first random number counter C1. The jackpot A or the jackpot B is determined.

  In this embodiment, when the jackpot A is reached, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, and when the jackpot B is reached, the red LED is turned on. Further, when it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. In addition, although the lighting of each LED is released when the next fluctuation display is started, it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation stops.

  After the process of S210 is completed, when the variation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is started, the lottery result (the current lottery result) of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variation start process is as follows. It is determined whether the special symbol is a big hit (S211). If the current lottery result is a special symbol jackpot (S211: Yes), the jackpot data is set based on the jackpot type (S212), and the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is initialized to 0 (S213). Then, the probability variation flag 203e is set to OFF (S214), a special symbol jackpot start is set (S215), and the process proceeds to S218. When the special symbol jackpot start is set by the processing of S215, when the jackpot control processing (S904) of the main processing (see FIG. 27) is executed, the process branches to S1001: Yes and an opening command is set. Is done. As a result, the big hit effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S211, if the current lottery result is out of the special symbol (S211: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 1 or more (S216), and the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 1. If it is above (S216: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the hour / minute counter 203f (S217), and the process proceeds to S218. On the other hand, if the value of the hour / middle counter 203f is 0 (S216: No), the process of S217 is skipped and the process proceeds to S218. In the process of S218, a stop command is set (S218), and then this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 21, the special symbol variation start process (S208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start process (S208). This special symbol change start process (S208) is a process executed in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 20) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19), and is an execution area of the special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a. Based on the values of the various counters stored in, a lottery (decision of success / failure) of “special symbol jackpot” or “exclusion of special symbol” is performed, and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 perform This is a process for determining the production pattern (variation pattern) of the fluctuation production.

  In the special symbol variation start process, first, each value of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is acquired. (S301).

  Next, referring to the state of the probability change flag 203e, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of changing the special symbol (S302). In the process of S302, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is changing the probability of the special symbol (that is, the probability change flag 203e is on) (S302: Yes), the first per-random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 And a lottery result as to whether or not the special symbol is a big hit based on the value of and a special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability (S303). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the 10 random numbers stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability. As described above, 10 random numbers that are big wins of special symbols are set to “0-9”, and the value of the first random number counter C1 matches the random number that hits them. When it does, it determines with it being a jackpot of the special symbol. If the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

  On the other hand, in the process of S302, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is not in a probability change (that is, the probability change flag 203e is off) (S302: No), the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state of a special symbol. Based on the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability, a lottery result as to whether or not the special symbol is jackpot is acquired (S304). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the random value “0” stored in the special symbol large random number table for low probability. When the value of the first winning random number counter C1 matches the winning random number value (ie, “0”), it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. If the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

  Then, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the process of S303 or S304 is a special symbol jackpot (S305). If it is determined that the special symbol is a big jackpot (S305: Yes), Based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301, the display mode for the big hit is set (S306). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the first hit type selection table, and two types of special symbol jackpots (jackpot A , The jackpot type B) is determined. As described above, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 63”, it is determined that it is a big hit A (16R probability variation big hit), and if it is in the range of “64 to 127”, the big hit It is determined that it is B (16R hour junior college hit) (see FIG. 8B).

  In the processing of S306, the display mode (the lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (big hit A, big hit B). Further, in order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B) is set as the stop type.

  Next, a variation pattern at the time of jackpot is determined (S307). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S307, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is stopped until the big hit symbol is stopped. The variation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the variation pattern table 202d (refer to FIG. 9A), and the variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 ( (Variation time).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S305 that the special symbol is out (S305: No), the display mode at the time of removal is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to a display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is set. Based on this, as the stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it is set whether it is front / rear out of reach, reach other than front / rear out, or complete out.

  Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol probability changing state, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for high probability. Then, set the stop type. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 115”, complete outage is set, and if it is in the range of “116 to 127”, outreach (other than front / rear out reach, excluding front / rear out) Set reach. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state of the special symbol, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is compared with the random value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability, and the stop type is determined. Set. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 101”, complete outage is set, and if it is in the range of “102 to 127”, outlier reach is set.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of deviation is determined (S309). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S307, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the variation pattern table 202d, and the variation pattern (variation) corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is compared. Time).

  When the processing of S307 or the processing of S309 is completed, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control apparatus 114 of the variation pattern determined by the processing of S307 or the processing of S309 is set (S310). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S306 or S308 is set (S311). These variation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the process of S901 of the main process (see FIG. 27). Is done. The sound lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the process of S311 ends, the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

  Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 19), and it is determined whether or not there is a win (start winning) at the first entrance 64 and there is a start winning. This is a process for holding a value indicated by various random number counters and prefetching a lottery result in a special symbol from the values indicated by the various random number counters held.

  When the start winning process is executed, it is first determined whether or not the ball has won a first winning slot 64 (start winning prize) (S401). Here, the entrance to the first entrance 64 is detected over three timer interruption processes. When it is determined that the ball has won the first entrance 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol reservation ball number counter 203c (the number N of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is acquired (S402). . Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S403).

  And, there is no winning at the first entrance 64 (S401: No), or even if there is a winning at the first entrance 64, the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is less than 4. If not (S403: No), the process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is a winning at the first entrance 64 (S401: Yes) and the value (N) of the special symbol reservation ball number counter 203c is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the number of special symbol reservation balls The value (N) of the counter 203c is incremented by 1 (S404). Then, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c changed by the calculation is set (S405).

  The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S901) of a main process (see FIG. 27) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. .

  After setting the pending ball number command by the process of S405, the values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above are stored in the RAM 203. Is stored in the first area among the empty reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a (S406), and this process is terminated and the process returns to the timer interruption process. In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is referred to. If the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  Next, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19), and is associated with the second symbol variation display performed by the second symbol display device 83 and the first entrance 64. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory.

  In this normal symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present symbol is hitting the normal symbol (second symbol) (S501). As a normal symbol (second symbol) hitting, while the second symbol display device 83 is showing the winning indication, and the opening and closing control of the electric accessory associated with the first entrance 64 is performed. Is included. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S501: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S501: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S502), and the second symbol display device is determined. If the display mode of 83 is not changing (S502: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired (S503). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (S504). If the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S504: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S504: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (S505).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S506). In the processing of S506, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is acquired (S507).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is in a short time state (S508). In the processing of S508, if the value of the hour / minute counter 203f of the RAM 203 is 1 or more, or if the probability variation flag 203e is on, it is determined that the symbol is in the short time state of the normal symbol.

  If it is determined in the processing of S508 that the normal symbol is in the short time state (S508: Yes), it is determined whether or not the present symbol is a big hit with the special symbol (S509). During the special symbol jackpot, the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the special symbol jackpot Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. If it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (S509: Yes), the process proceeds to S511. In the present embodiment, the special symbol lottery is difficult to win during the special symbol jackpot. This is because during the big hit of the special symbol (that is, during the special game state), the player hits the ball in an attempt to win the special winning opening 65a, so that the electric accessory attached to the first inlet 64 is released. This is to prevent the balls that are going to win the special winning opening 65a from entering the first winning opening 64 as much as possible. In addition, since the special winning opening 65a is provided immediately below the first winning opening 64, the first winning opening 65a is not limited to the first winning opening even if the ball is prevented from entering the first winning opening 64 during the big hit of the special symbol. A lot of balls enter the entrance 64. As a result, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is transitioning to the special game state, the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 becomes maximum (four times).

  In the process of S509, if the special symbol is not big hit (S509: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the big hit of the special symbol, and the pachinko machine 10 is in the short time state of the normal symbol, so acquired in the process of S507. Based on the value of the second per random number counter C4 and the normal symbol random number table for high probability, a lottery result indicating whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S510). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the random number table per ordinary symbol for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5-212”, it is determined that the symbol is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of “0-4, 213-255”, It is determined that it is out of the normal symbol (see FIG. 8C).

  In the process of S508, if it is determined that the time is not the normal drawing time reduction state (S508: No), the process proceeds to S511. In the process of S511, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S507, and the low Based on the random number table per normal symbol for probability, a lottery result indicating whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S511). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the random number table per normal symbol for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5-20”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of “0-4, 21-255”, It is determined that the symbol is out of the normal symbol (see FIG. 8C).

  Next, it is determined whether the normal symbol lottery result acquired by the processing of S510 or S511 is a normal symbol win (S512). If it is determined that the normal symbol wins (S512: Yes) The display mode for winning is set (S513). In the process of S513, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol “◯” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is in the short time state (S514). If the normal symbol is in the short time state (S514: Yes), it is determined whether or not the present symbol is a big hit of the special symbol (S515). ). As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S515: Yes), the process proceeds to S517. In the present embodiment, during the big hit of the special symbol, in order to suppress the sphere from entering the first entrance 64 as much as possible, even when it hits the normal symbol, it is the same as when the normal symbol is off In addition, the number of opening times and the opening time of the electric accessory are set.

  In the process of S515, if the special symbol is not a big hit (S515: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in a special symbol big hit, and the pachinko machine 10 is in a short time state of a normal symbol. The opening period of the electric accessory attached to 64 is set to 1 second, the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S516), and the process proceeds to S519. In the process of S514, when the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 0 (S514: No), the process proceeds to S517. In the process of S517, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the opening period of the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is set to 0. In addition to setting for 2 seconds, the number of releases is set to 1 (S517), and the process proceeds to S519.

  If it is determined in step S512 that the symbol is out of the normal symbol (S512: No), the display mode at the time of removal is set (S518). In the process of S518, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol “x” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of detachment is completed, the process proceeds to S519.

  In the process of S519, it is determined whether or not the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 1 or more (S519). The display variation time is set to 3 seconds (S520), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 0 (S519: No), the variation display variation time in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S521), and this processing is terminated. In this way, except for the big hit of the special symbol, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the time of the variable display becomes “30 seconds → 3 seconds” as compared with the case of the low probability of the normal symbol, and further, Since the release period of the first entrance 64 becomes very long as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the first entrance 64.

  In the process of S502, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S502: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S522). The variation time here is a time preset by the processing of S520 or the processing of S521 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device 83.

  If the variation time has not elapsed in the processing of S522 (S522: No), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed in the process of S522 (S522: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S523). In the process of S523, if the normal symbol lottery is won, and the display mode is set by the process of S513, the symbol “◯” as the second symbol is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 (lights up). Display). On the other hand, if the normal symbol lottery is lost and the display mode is set by the processing of S518, the “x” symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lit display) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to When the stop display is set by the process of S523, when the second symbol display update process (see S907) of the main process (see FIG. 27) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is displayed. The stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 (lighted display) in the display mode set in the processing of S513 or S518.

  Next, whether or not the normal symbol lottery result (the current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process is the normal symbol hit when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 is started. Is determined (S524). If the current lottery result is a normal symbol (S524: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is set (S525), and this process is terminated. When the start of opening / closing control of the electric accessory is set by the processing of S525, when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S905) of the main process (see FIG. 27) is executed next, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is executed. Is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the processing of S516 or S517 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S524, if the current lottery result is out of the normal symbol (S524: No), the process of S525 is skipped and the process is terminated.

  Next, the through gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passing process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19), and it is determined whether or not a sphere has passed through the through gate 67. This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the random number counter C4.

  In the through gate passing process, first, it is determined whether or not the sphere has passed through the through gate 67 (S601). Here, the passage of the sphere in the through gate 67 is detected over three timer interruption processes. If it is determined that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (S601: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired (S602). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S603).

  Whether the ball has not passed through the through gate 67 (S601: No), or even if the ball has passed through the through gate 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol reservation ball number counter 203d is not less than 4 (S603) : No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the through gate 67 (S601: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reservation ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S603: Yes), the normal symbol reservation ball number counter 203d The value (M) is incremented by 1 (S604). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interruption process described above is used as the first of the free reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. (S605), and this process ends. In the process of S605, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203d is referred to. If the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as a setting of the power-off occurrence information (S701), and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

  The above NMI interrupt process is executed in the same manner in the payout and emission control device 111, and information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt process is started.

  Next, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 when the main control apparatus 110 is powered on will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This start-up process is activated by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S801). For example, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Next, a wait process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the sub-side control device (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be operable. (S802). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S803).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S804). If it is turned on (S804: Yes), the process proceeds to S812. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S804: No), it is further determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S805), and if not stored (S805: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown has not ended normally, the process proceeds to S812 also in this case.

  If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S805: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S806). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S807: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data has been destroyed. In such a case as well, the process proceeds to S812. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the processing of S914 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S812, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S812). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and enters a state in which game ball payout control can be started. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S813, S814) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed. Accordingly, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S813, S814) is executed. Similarly, the initialization process (S813, S814) of the RAM 203 is executed when the information on occurrence of power interruption is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the RAM initialization process (S813, S814), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S813), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S814). After the initialization process of the RAM 203 is executed, the process proceeds to S810.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S804: No), information on occurrence of power interruption is stored (S805: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.) is normal ( (S807: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while the backed up data is retained in the RAM 203 (S808). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state when the drive power supply is cut off is transmitted (S809), and the process proceeds to S810. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the process of S810, an effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, an interrupt is permitted (S811), and the process proceeds to a main process described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 after the above startup process will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S901 to S907 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 milliseconds, and the counter update process of S910 and S911 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main process, first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19), output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is transmitted to each control device (peripheral). External output processing to be transmitted to the control device is executed (S901). Specifically, the presence / absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading processing of S101 in the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 19) is determined, and if there is winning detection information, the payout control device 111 corresponds to the number of balls acquired. Send a prize ball command. Further, the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 20) or the start winning process (see FIG. 22) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Also, the winning information command set in the start winning process is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, and the like necessary for the third symbol variation display by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, the opening command, the round number command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 28) are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a sphere, a sphere launch signal is transmitted to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S902). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (256 in the present embodiment). Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S903), and then, when the special symbol is in the big hit state, execution of the big hit effect or variable A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S904). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round of the big hit state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have won the specific winning opening 65a. When any of these conditions is met, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S904) is executed in the main process, but may be executed in the timer interrupt process. Details of the jackpot control process (S904) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, an electric accessory opening / closing process for performing opening / closing control of the electric accessory associated with the first entrance 64 is executed (S905). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S525 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 23), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the processing of S516 or the processing of S517 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

  Next, the 1st symbol display update process which updates the display of the 1st symbol display apparatus 37 is performed (S906). In the first symbol display update process, when the variation pattern is set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 21), the variation display corresponding to the variation pattern is displayed as the first symbol display. Begin at device 37. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation starts, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. The green LED is turned on, and if the green LED is lit, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on. If the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is turned off. And turn on the red LED.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed every time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted once every time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The counter value is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  In the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 21) is completed, the first symbol display device The variation display being executed at 37 is terminated, and the stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed as the first symbol in the display mode set by the processing of S306 or the processing of S308 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 21). The device 37 is stopped (lighted).

  Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S907). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the processing of S520 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 23) or the processing of S521, the second symbol display device 83 displays the variation display. Start. Thereby, in the 2nd symbol display apparatus 83, the variable display which turns on the symbol of "(circle)" and the symbol of "x" as a 2nd symbol alternately is performed. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the processing of S523 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 23), it is executed in the second symbol display device 83. The display of the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the processing of S513 or the processing of S518 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 23). (Lights up).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S908). If the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S908: No), a power failure signal is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. SG1 is not output and the power supply is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the next main process execution timing has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 milliseconds in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current main process (S909). If the predetermined time has already passed (S909: Yes), the process proceeds to S901, and the above-described processes after S901 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time (4 milliseconds) has not yet elapsed since the start of the current main process (S909: No), the remaining time until the predetermined time is reached, that is, until the next main process is executed. Within the time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S910, S911).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S910). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum value (both 255 in this embodiment). Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S902 (S911).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S901-S907 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next main process execution timing is not constant and varies. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  In the process of S908, if the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S908: Yes), the power supply is shut down due to the occurrence of a power outage or the power off, and the power outage monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power outage signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 25 has been executed, the process at the time of power-off after S912 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S912), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113). (S913). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S914), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S915), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area to be backed up in the RAM 203.

  Note that the processing of S908 is performed at the timing when the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S901 to S907 ends, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S910 and S911 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main controller 110, the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. The process can be started from S901. That is, the process can be started from the process of S901 as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at the time of power-off, the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the initialization process (see S801 in FIG. 26). When the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value (initial value), the process can start from S901. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the main control device 110 and to perform accurate control without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S904) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S904). This jackpot control process (S904) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 27). When the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol jackpot state, execution of various effects according to the jackpot or a specific winning prize ( This is a process for opening or closing the large opening) 65a.

  In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether or not a special symbol jackpot is started (S1001). Specifically, if the process of S215 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 20) is executed and the start of the special symbol jackpot is set, it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is started. In the process of S1001, when the special symbol jackpot is started (S1001: Yes), an opening command is set (S1002), the jackpot flag 203g is set to ON (S1003), and this process is terminated.

  The opening command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the audio lamp control is performed in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 27) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the device 113. Upon receiving the opening command, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits a display opening command to the display control device 114. When the display opening command is received by the display control device 114, an opening effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if the special symbol jackpot is not started in the processing of S1001 (S1001: No), it is determined whether the special symbol jackpot is being hit (S1004). During the special symbol jackpot, the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the special symbol jackpot Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. In the process of S1004, if the special symbol is not big hit (S1004: No), this process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1004, if the special symbol is a big hit (S1004: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1005). If it is the start timing of a new round (S1005: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened (S1006), and a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (S1007). After the round number command is set, this process ends. The round number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 27) executed by the MPU 201, the voice lamp Sent to the control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, it extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When a display round number command is received by the display control device 114, a new round effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1005, if it is not the start timing of a new round (S1005: No), it is determined whether the closing condition for the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1008). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened, or a predetermined number of balls have been opened after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a. When winning (for example, 10), it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

  In the processing of S1008, when the closing condition for the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1008: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed (S1009), and this processing is ended. To do. On the other hand, if the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is not satisfied (S1008: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1010). Specifically, it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect when the special gaming state (all 16 rounds) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual is completed.

  In the process of S1010, when it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1010: Yes), an ending command is set (S1011), and this process ends. The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the audio lamp control is performed in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 27) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the device 113. When receiving the ending command, the sound lamp control device 113 selects the display mode of the ending effect based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a of the RAM 223. Then, a display ending command corresponding to the display mode of the selected ending effect is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, the ending effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1010 that it is not the ending start timing (S1010: No), it is next determined whether it is the end timing of the current jackpot (special gaming state) (S1012). In the process of S1012, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the jackpot (special game state) (S1012: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the processing of S1012, if it is determined that it is the end timing (S1012: Yes), then it is determined whether it is a big hit A (S1013), and if it is a big hit A (S1013: Yes), the probability variation flag 203e is set to ON (S1015), and the process proceeds to S1016. On the other hand, in the process of S1013, if it is determined that the jackpot A is not (that is, the jackpot B) (S1013: No), the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is set to 100 (S1014), and the process proceeds to S1016. Transition.

  In the process of S1014 or the process of S1016 executed after the process of S1015 is completed, the jackpot flag 203g is set to OFF, and then this process is terminated.

<Regarding the Control Processing of the Sound Lamp Control Device in the First Embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 to 34. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, and a main process that is executed after the startup process.

  First, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S1101). Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Thereafter, depending on whether or not the power-off process flag is turned on, the power-on process of S1217 (see FIG. 30) is performed due to an instantaneous voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called “momentary power failure”). ) Is determined during execution (S1102). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 30, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S1214 in FIG. 30), it executes a power-off process in S1217. The power-off process flag is turned on before the power-off process is executed, and the power-off process flag is turned off after the power-off process ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S1217 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off process flag.

  If the power-off processing flag is off (S1102: No), the current start-up processing is started after the power supply is completely shut off or after an instantaneous power failure has occurred and the power-off in S1217 is performed. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or started only after the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1103).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1106. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data destruction in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1103: Yes), the process proceeds to S1104, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1103: No), the process proceeds to S1108.

  If the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off). ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1103: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1104. On the other hand, this startup process was started after an instantaneous power failure and after completing the power-off process in S1217, or reset only to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. When the process starts, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1103: No), and the process proceeds to S1108. .

  In the process of S1102, if the power-off process in progress flag is on (S1102: Yes), the current start-up process is after an instantaneous power failure, and during the execution of the power-off process of S1217, This was started when the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since control cannot be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S1104 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S1104, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S1104), and it is determined whether each storage area of the RAM 223 is normal (S1105). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”. If “0FFh”, it is determined as normal. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. This RAM 223 read / write check clears all storage areas of the RAM 223 to zero.

  In the processing of S1105, if it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1105: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 and the RAM destruction check data is set ( S1106). By checking the keyword “55AAh” written in the specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1105: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1107), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The sound output device 226 may output a sound to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. It may be.

  In the process of S1108, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag 223y is turned on (S1108). The power-off flag 223y is turned on when the power-off process in S1217 is executed (see S1215 in FIG. 30). In other words, since the power-off flag 223y is turned on before the power-off process of S1217 is executed, the process of S1108 with the power-off flag 223y being turned on is the current startup process. This is a case where the process is started after a power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S1217 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1108: Yes), the RAM work area is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S1109), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1110), and an interrupt is performed. The permission is set (S1111), and the process proceeds to the main process. Note that the work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, when the power-off flag 223y is turned off, the process of S1108 is reached because the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, for example, and the process from S1104 to S1106 is performed. Or when the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S1108: No), S1109, which is the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process proceeds to S1110, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1110), and interrupt permission is set. In step S1111, the process proceeds to the main process.

  The reason for skipping the clear process in S1109 is that when the process from S1104 to S1108 is reached via the process in S1106, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process in S1104. When only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is stored without being cleared, so that the sound lamp control device 113 is saved. This is because the control can be continued.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the previous processing of S1201 was executed (S1201). If not (S1201: No), the process proceeds to S1212 without performing S1202 to S1211. In S1201, the process of determining whether 1 msec has passed or not is mainly related to the display (production) in S1202 to S1211, whereas it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S1212 and the variation display setting process of S1213 in a short cycle. By executing the process of S1212 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent a command received from the main controller 110 from being missed. By executing the process of S1213 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process Based on the above, it is possible to make a setting related to the changing effect without delay.

  If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the processing of S1201 (S1201: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S1203 to S1213 are transmitted to the display control device 114 ( S1202). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the processing of S1208 described later are set (S1203), and then the power-on notification processing is executed (S1204). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, a notification is given to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). The notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Is called. Moreover, it is good also as what transmits a command to the display control apparatus 114 so that it may alert | report that power was supplied on the screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1205 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S1205, a waiting-for-waiting effect process is executed, and then a hold number display update process is executed (S1206). In the customer waiting effect process, when a predetermined period of time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is displayed as a command. Sent to device 114. In the reserved number display update process, a process for turning on a reserved lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is performed.

  Thereafter, frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S1207). This frame button input monitoring / production process monitors the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed to enhance the production effect, and corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting to produce an effect. In this process, when an operation by the player on the frame button 22 is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  Also, when the frame button 22 is pressed during a period in which the change effect is not executed or during the high-speed change period, a process for changing the stage is performed, and a rear image change command for the display control device 114 is set. By including information on the type of the back image corresponding to the stage after the change in the back image change command, the display control device 114 displays the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as an image corresponding to the stage. Processing to change to is performed. In addition, when a notice character appears at the start of fluctuation display, the expected value of the jackpot due to the current fluctuation is displayed by pressing the frame button 22, or the expectation of the jackpot is displayed by pressing the frame button 22 during reach production. It is good also as a decision button for changing to the production | presentation which can have, or selecting the reach | reduction effect of the frame button 22 among several reach productions. If the frame button 22 is not provided, the process of S1207 is omitted.

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process ends, a lamp editing process is executed (S1208), and then a sound editing / output process is executed (S1209). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output process, the output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S1209, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1210). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. The lamp editing process in S1208 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing / output processing of S1209 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed in the third symbol display device 81.

  When the processing of S1210 is completed, a “reselection” is determined when the announcement effect is determined, and therefore a notice random selection process is performed to acquire a new random value (determination value) and reselect the announcement effect. (S1211), and the process proceeds to S1212. Details of this notice reselection process (S1211) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S1212, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main controller 110 is performed (S1212). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG. After the command determination process, a variable display setting process is executed (S1213). In the variation display setting process, a variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute a variation effect. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. Details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  When the processing of S1213 is completed, it is determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1214). The information on the occurrence of power-off is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 110. If it is determined in the processing of S1214 that the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored (S1214: Yes), both the power interruption flag 223y and the power interruption processing flag are set to ON (S1216). The disconnection process is executed (S1217). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process flag is turned off (S1218), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. Further, the storage of the information on occurrence of power interruption is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the information on occurrence of power interruption is not stored in the process of S1214 (S1214: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1215), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1215: No), the process returns to S1201, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1215: Yes), the process is looped infinitely in order to stop the subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, he can call a hall clerk or the like and request repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

  Next, a command determination process (S1212) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the command determination process (S1212). This command determination processing (S1212) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. .

  In the command determination process, first, the first command received from the main controller 110 among unprocessed commands is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110. It is determined whether or not (S1301). When the variation pattern command is received (S1301: Yes), the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S1302), and the variation pattern type is extracted from the received variation pattern command (S1303). Return to the main process. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when a variation display setting process (see FIG. 32) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and its variation pattern type.

  On the other hand, if the variation pattern command has not been received (S1301: No), it is then determined whether or not a stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1304). When the stop type command is received (S1304: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1305), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1306). Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when a later-described variable display setting process (see FIG. 32) is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect.

  On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1304: No), it is then determined whether or not a reserved ball number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1307). If it is determined that the held ball number command has been received (S1307: Yes), the value included in the received held ball number command, that is, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110. (The number N of variable display hold in the special symbol) is extracted and stored in the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1308). In the process of S1308, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is set. After the process of S1308 ends, the process returns to the main process.

  Here, since the number-of-holding balls command is sent from the main controller 110 when the ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning) or when a special symbol lottery is performed, the starting win is received. Is detected, or every time a special symbol is drawn, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed to the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter of the main control device 110 by the process of S1308. It can be adjusted to the value of 203c. Therefore, even if the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, At the time of symbol lottery, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 can be corrected to match the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110. When the process of S1308 is executed, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display controller 114 of the updated value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is set. Thereby, in the display control device 114, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of reserved balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined in the processing of S1307 that the pending ball number command has not been received (S1307: No), it is then determined whether or not an opening command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1309). If it is determined that the opening command has been received (S1309: Yes), the display opening command is set (S1310), and the process returns to the main process. The display opening command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1202) of the main process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the control device 114. When receiving the display opening command, the display control device 114 starts the opening effect on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if the opening command has not been received in the processing of S1309 (S1309: No), it is next determined whether or not a round number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1311). If it is determined that the round number command has been received (S1311: Yes), the number of rounds is extracted from the received round number command (S1312), and the display round number command is set according to the extracted round number. In step S1313, the process ends. The display round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1202) of the main process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the display control device 114. When receiving the display round number command, the display control device 114 starts a new round effect in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1311 that a round number command has not been received (S1311: No), it is then determined whether an ending command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1314). If it is determined that an ending command has been received (S1314: Yes), a display ending command is set (S1315), and this process ends. The display ending command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1202) of the main process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the control device 114. When receiving the display ending command, the display control device 114 starts the ending effect in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1314 that an ending command has not been received (S1314: No), it is determined whether another command has been received, and processing corresponding to the received command is executed. (S1316), the process returns to the main process. For example, if the other command is a command used in the sound lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used in the display control device 114, the command is displayed. The command is set to be transmitted to the device 114.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 32, the variable display setting process (S1213) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the change display setting process (S1213). This variable display setting process (S1213) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and in order to execute a variable effect in the third symbol display device 81, A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

  In the variation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S1401). If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is not on (that is, it is off) (S1401: No), the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110, so the process of S1407 is performed. Migrate to On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is on (S1401: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223c is turned off (S1402), and then the fluctuation pattern is determined in the process of S1303 of the command determination process (see FIG. 31). The variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1403).

  Then, based on the obtained variation pattern type, a variation pattern command for display for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set for transmission to the display control device 114 (S1404). The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variation effect is started.

  Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S1405). In the process of S1405, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223a to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, and fourth area → third area. After the data is shifted, a notice effect selection process for selecting a notice effect aspect to be displayed in addition to the change pattern (fluctuation display) is executed (S1406), and then the process proceeds to S1407. Details of the notice effect selection process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the processing of S1407, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223d provided in the RAM 233 is on (S1407). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S1407: No), the stop type command has not been received from the main control device 110, and therefore this fluctuation display is performed. The setting process ends, and the process returns to the main process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is on (S1407: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d is set to off (S1408), and then the process of S1306 in the command determination process (see FIG. 31). In step S1409, the stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223. Next, a display stop type command is set based on the stop type acquired in the process of S1409 (S1410), and this process ends. By receiving this display stop type command, the display control device 114 performs control so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the stop display of the third symbol with the stop type indicated by the display stop type command. Is done.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 33, the notice effect selection process (S1406) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the notice effect selection process (S1406). This notice effect selection process (S1406) is executed in the variable display setting process (see FIG. 32) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and is displayed in addition to the change display (fluctuation pattern). This is a process for determining the mode and notifying the display control device 114 of this.

  In the notice effect setting process (S1406), first, an effect random number (determination value) for use in determining the notice effect is obtained from the effect random number generation IC 800 (S1501). The obtained effect random number value is temporarily stored in, for example, a buffer area (effect random number buffer) provided in the other memory area 223z. Next, it is determined whether or not the current lottery result is a big hit (S1502). The notice effect is selected (determined) based on the effect random number (effect counter value) stored in the effect random number buffer (S1504), and the process proceeds to S1505.

  As described above with reference to FIG. 11C, when the value of the effect random number (effect counter) is “0 to 149”, “notice effect A” is determined as the type of effect. When the value is “150 to 224”, “notice effect B” is determined, and when the value is “225 to 249”, “notice effect C” is determined. On the other hand, when the value is “250 to 255”, “reselection” is determined. As described above, when “reselection” is determined, a new random number value is acquired from the effect random number generation IC 800 in the notice reselection process (see FIG. 34) described later, and the type of notice effect is regenerated. Decide (reselect).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, 250 values are used for selecting the notice effect among the 8-bit (256 ways) effect random number values that can be generated by the effect random number generation IC 800. In other words, the number of decimal values that are well-separated (that is, 250) can be used for determining the notice effect. Therefore, the probability that each notice effect is selected can be set to a good value (10%, 30%, 60%) (the probability percentage is converted into an integer). This makes it easier for the player to understand the probability that each notice effect will be selected. Further, the developer who designs the probability of the notice effect can set the probability more easily.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1502 that the lottery result is a jackpot (S1502: Yes), the jackpot notice effect selection table 222b1 (see FIG. 11B) and the effect stored in the effect random number buffer The notice effect is selected (determined) based on the random number value (effect counter value) (S1503), and then the process proceeds to S1505. Specifically, as described above with reference to FIG. 11B, when the effect random number (effect counter value) is “0 to 24”, “notice effect A” is set as the type of the effect. Is determined, and when the value is “25 to 99”, “notice effect B” is determined as the type of the notice effect, and when the value is “100 to 249”, “ The “notice effect C” is determined. On the other hand, when the value is “250 to 255”, “reselection” is determined.

  In the process of S1505, it is determined whether or not the selection result of the notice effect is “reselection” (S1505). Is set to display the notice effect command for display (S1507), and the process is terminated.

  The display announcement effect command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1202) of the main process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display notice effect command for display, and sets the display of the notice effect shown by the display notice effect command for display. That is, the notice effect data table corresponding to the notified notice effect type is combined with the variable display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. When synthesizing, the display contents specified in the notice effect data table are displayed for each address after the address (value of the pointer 233f) corresponding to the start timing of the notice effect specified in the effect timing storage area 233j. to add. That is, the display contents after the start timing of the notice effect are defined for each elapsed time in the notice effect data table. By configuring in this way, the display data table storage area 233b can be used more efficiently than in the case where addresses for all variable times are prepared in the notice effect data table.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1505 that “reselection” has been determined (selected) (S1505: Yes), the notice reselection flag 223e is set to ON (S1506), and this processing ends. By setting the notice reselection flag 223e to ON, it is possible to newly determine the type of the notice effect by newly obtaining the effect random value in the notice reselection process (see FIG. 34) described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 34, the notice reselection process (S1211) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the notice reselection process (S1211). This notice reselection process (S1211) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the notice reselection processing (S1211), first, it is determined whether or not the notice reselection flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is on (S1601). As described above, the notice reselection flag 223e is a flag that is set to ON when “reselection” is determined when the type of notice effect is determined. This is a flag indicating whether or not it is necessary to reselect the effect.

  In the process of S1601, when it is determined that the notice reselection flag 223e is off (S1601: No), it is not necessary to reselect the notice effect, and thus this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1601 that the notice reselection flag 223e is on (S1601: Yes), it is necessary to reselect the notice effect (when determining the type of the previous notice effect, “ "Reselection" is determined, and the type of the notice effect is not determined). Therefore, in this case, an effect random number is obtained from the effect random number generation IC 800 (S1602), and then whether the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot (the change display for setting the notice effect is to notify the jackpot) It is determined whether or not the display is variable (S1603).

  If it is determined in the processing of S1603 that the display is not a variable display that notifies the jackpot (S1603: No), the off-notice notice effect selection table 222b2 (see FIG. 11C) and the effect random number (effect counter value) Based on the above, the notice effect is selected (determined) (S1605), and the process proceeds to S1606.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1603, when it is determined that the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot (S1603: Yes), the jackpot notice effect selection table 222b1 (see FIG. 11B) and the effect random number (effect) The type of the notice effect is selected based on the counter value) (S1604), and the process proceeds to S1606.

  In the process of S1606, it is determined whether the selection result of the notice effect is reselection (S1606). If the selection result of the notice effect is not reselected (S1606: No), a notice effect command is set based on the result of selecting the notice effect (S1614), and the process proceeds to S1612.

  When “reselection” is determined when determining (selecting) the type of the notice effect, 1 is added to the value of the notice reselection counter 223f (S1607), and then the reselection counter is selected. It is determined whether the value of is 10 or more (S1608). In the processing of S1608, when it is determined that the value of the notice reselection counter 223f is less than 10 (S1608: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if the value of the notice reselection counter 223f is 10 or more in the processing of S1608 (S1608: Yes), the reselection of the notice effect is discontinued, and the specification different from the normal notice effect (the notice effects A to C) is specified. The process (S1609 to S1611) for setting the notice effect (the jackpot confirmed notice effect, the jackpot expectation large notice effect) is executed. Stopping reselection when the number of consecutive reselections reaches 10 or more prevents “reselection” from being selected (decided) indefinitely and preventing (suppressing) the type of notice effect from being determined it can. Therefore, any one of the notice effects can be reliably displayed at the display timing of the notice effect.

  Processing for canceling the re-selection of the notice effect and setting a specific notice effect (a jackpot finalizing notice effect or a jackpot expectation large notice effect) different from the normal notice effect (notice effects A to C) (S1609 to In S1611), first, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit (whether the fluctuation display for setting the notice effect is a fluctuation display for notifying the big hit) (S1609). In the processing of S1609, if it is determined that the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit (S1609: Yes), the big hit is confirmed as a specific notice effect (a big hit confirmation notice effect, a big hit expectation degree big notice effect). A display notice effect command for display for notifying the notice effect is set (S1610), and the process proceeds to S1612. On the other hand, in the processing of S1609, when it is determined that the lottery result of the special symbol is not a big hit (is out of place) (S1609: No), A display notice effect command for display for notifying a notice effect that suggests that the degree of expectation for jackpot is high is set (S1611), and the process proceeds to S1612.

  As described above, when “reselection” is continuously determined for a predetermined number of times (10 times) or more, a specific notice effect that is not stipulated in the notice effect selection table 222b (a jackpot confirmed notice effect, a big expectation degree of jackpot) By setting the (notice effect), it is possible to make the player think that an unusual notice effect is displayed, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. Note that the probability that “reselection” is determined 10 times in succession is a very low probability of 6/256 to the 10th power (approximately 1/2 K). For this reason, it is possible to give the player a greater joy by displaying specific notice effects (a jackpot confirmation notice effect, a jackpot expectation degree notice effect).

  In the processing of S1612 executed after the processing of S1610, S1611, or S1614, the value of the notice reselection counter 223f is initialized to 0 (S1612), the notice reselection flag 223e is set to OFF (S1613), and this process is performed. Exit. By this notice reselection process (see FIG. 34), the type of the notice effect is determined without stopping other processes by reselecting the notice effect every millisecond in the main process (see FIG. 30). can do.

  In the present embodiment, the reselection of the notice effect is terminated when “reselection” is repeated ten times. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the predetermined number of times that “reselect” is selected may be set large (for example, 20 times) or may be set small (for example, 5 times). Naturally, the passage of a predetermined time may be used as an opportunity (for example, 3 seconds after the first “reselection” is selected).

  In this embodiment, when the reselection of the notice effect is terminated, a specific notice effect (a jackpot confirmation notice effect or a jackpot expectation large notice effect) is set. Of course, it may be set so as not to exist.

  In the present embodiment, the re-selection is performed in the selection of the notice effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may naturally be configured such that reselection is performed in the selection of the effect mode of the effect (so-called button press effect) displayed when the button is pressed.

<Regarding Control Process of Display Control Device in First Embodiment>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. The MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main process that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt process that is executed when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, and one frame worth from the image controller 237. There is a V-interrupt process executed when the MPU 231 detects a V-interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command reception processing is preferentially executed. As a result, the contents of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

  First, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process executes an initialization process when the power is turned on.

  Specifically, the main process is activated according to the following flow. When power is turned on from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to “0000H” according to its hardware configuration. The address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is “0000H”, it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts the main process by starting execution of the process according to the fetched instruction.

  Here, if all the boot programs processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 confirms that the address specified on the bus line 240 is “0000H”. Upon detection, one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set it from the reading to the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 receives the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” after designating the address “0000H”. A lot of waiting time will be consumed. Therefore, since the time required for starting the MPU 231 becomes longer, as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, as in this embodiment, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in the NOR ROM 234d in the boot program. Since the memory can read data, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  When the main processing is executed as described above, first, the boot processing executed by the boot program is executed (S1701), and the display control device 114 is configured so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. Start up.

  Here, the boot processing (S1701) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S1701) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. It is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area, so that not only image data but also a control program or the like can be sufficiently stored. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND type flash memory has a low reading speed especially when random access is performed. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are transferred to the program storage area 233a or data table provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing it is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the hardware operations of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234 described above, the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d after the system reset is released is read according to the boot program set in the buffer RAM 234c. Among the control programs stored in the two program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S1801). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the head address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S1802). Thereby, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot program included in the control program transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S1801.

  Also, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address in the program storage area 233a by the processing in S1802, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the processing of S1802, it is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program that is started to be executed by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S1803). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-described various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S1804), the instruction pointer 231a is executed after the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of the boot process (see S1701 in FIG. 35). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S1702 in FIG. 35) (S1805), the boot program is finished and the boot process is terminated.

  As described above, by executing the boot process (S1701), the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. At the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address described above. Thereafter, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. To execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control program and fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 By transferring the data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out a control program and fixed value data from a work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high reading speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect section.

  On the other hand, not all boot programs are stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d, but a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND-type flash memory 234a. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR-type ROM 234d, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time. Can do.

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 36, the predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S1801 includes all remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although it is configured, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. A predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S1801 is a boot program that executes a boot process to be processed following the process of S1802 It may be part of The boot program transferred here transfers a predetermined amount of the control program including the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set as an instruction pointer. The process set to 231a may be performed. Then, the processing of S1803 to S1805 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  In addition, the boot program transferred by the processing of S1801 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and then the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. Processing for setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. In addition, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. Processing for setting the head address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and then the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S1801. The processing of S1803 to S1805 may be executed after repeating a plurality of times including the processing of S1802.

  As a result, even if the boot program has a large program size and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount.

  In the present embodiment, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is canceled. One program storage area 234d1 may be stored. In this case, when starting the boot process, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S1803 to S1805 without performing the processes of S1801 and S1802. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the boot processing time. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231 that can be performed after the boot process can be started earlier.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. When the boot process is completed, an initial setting process is executed in accordance with the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S1702). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231 and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for the respective flags. Note that “off” or “0” is set as the initial value of each flag unless otherwise specified.

  Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instructing execution of display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, immediately after turning on the power, the pachinko machine 10 is checked by checking whether an image of a color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the start can be normally started.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S1703). This transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on, transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. In accordance with this transfer instruction, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with the transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

  When the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the transfer end to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can recognize that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, transfer end information indicating the end of transfer is stored in a register or a partial area of the built-in memory provided in the image controller 237. You may make it write. The MPU 231 reads information in this register or a partial area of the built-in memory as needed, and detects that transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has been completed by detecting writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237. You may do it.

  The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S1703, the power-on variation image is then displayed. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so that the image data corresponding to is transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S1704). In this transfer instruction, the head address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image, the data size of the image data, transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), , The start address of the power-on variation image area 235b as the transfer destination is included, and the image controller receives image data corresponding to the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 in the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with the transfer instruction. The image is transferred to the fluctuation image area 235b at power-on. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S1704, the simple image display flag 233c is then displayed. Is turned on (S1705). Thus, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in a transfer setting process (see FIG. 47A) described later. Resident image transfer setting processing for instructing transfer to the image controller 237 so as to transfer is executed (see S3302 in FIG. 47A).

  The simple image display flag 233c is used to transfer all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on a transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It remains on until it is finished. Thus, during this time, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 37B), the simple command so that the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image) shown in FIG. 13 is drawn. Determination processing (see S2008 in FIG. 37B) and simple display setting processing (see S2009 in FIG. 37B) are executed.

  As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is caused by the slow reading speed. It takes a lot of time to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is transferred to the third image. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall-related person can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The main image can be confirmed. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 114. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player resides in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

  Also in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts operating without any problem when the power is turned on. The use of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234 can suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

  In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the power-on variation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after the power is turned on. When the player starts playing while being displayed on the display device 81, the player enters the first entrance 64 (start winning), and the main control device 110 instructs the start of the variation effect by controlling the sound lamp. When the display 113 is received, that is, when the display variation pattern command is received, the power-on variation image shown in FIGS. 13B and 13C is immediately displayed during the variation production period. A simple variation effect can be performed. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery is surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on.

  As described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234 is displayed. Is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, and therefore, it takes time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the time during which the main image is displayed when the power is turned on also becomes longer. However, since the pachinko machine 10 can perform a simple variation effect using the power-on variation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, after power failure Even immediately after the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the processing of S1705, interrupt permission is set (S1706), and thereafter, the main processing executes infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Thereby, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S1706, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

  Next, a command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37A is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process. As described above, when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interrupt process.

  In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S1901), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are read by a command determination process or a simple command determination process of a V interrupt process described later, and a process corresponding to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 37B, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 37B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 18) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

  As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V-interrupt signal is a signal that is generated every 20 milliseconds when image rendering processing for one frame is completed in the image controller 237 and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not finished, so that drawing of a new image is started in the middle of drawing the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  Here, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt process will be described first, and then the details of each process will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 37B, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2001), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on. If it is off (S2001: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. Therefore, it is not a power-on image shown in FIG. In order to display an image on the third symbol display device 81, a command determination process (S2002) is executed, and then a display setting process (S2003) is executed.

  In the command determination process (S2002), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process is analyzed, and the process according to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, a display data table for demonstration or a variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, and it is highly likely that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the main control device 110 determines the start of a variation effect, there is a high possibility that a display variation pattern command, a display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the variation effect mode and stop type selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and an effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. Drawing of an image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In the display setting process (S2003), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S2002) or the like, an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. The contents of are specifically identified. Further, an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and a display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. Details of the display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the display setting process is executed, a task process is then executed (S2004). In this task process, the image is constructed based on the content of the next one frame image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S2003) or the simple display setting process (S2009). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be performed, various parameters necessary for drawing such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

  Next, a transfer setting process is executed (S2005). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. In addition, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is transmitted from the character ROM 234 to the normal controller for the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information in the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 and receiving a continuous notice command or a back image change command from the audio lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously connected. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous notice image used in the notice effect and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 47 and 48.

  Next, a drawing process is executed (S2006). In this drawing process, the types of sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2004), parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S2005) are used. The drawing list shown in FIG. 18 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list. Details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2007). Then, the V interrupt process ends. As a counter updated by the processing of S2007, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and an update process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed. When reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A, big hit B, front / rear outreach, reach other than front / rear out, reach out, chance The stop type table corresponding to the eye) is compared with the stop symbol counter, and the stop symbol after the change effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2001 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2001: Yes), this means that transfer of all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image shown in FIG. 13 on the third symbol display device 81, a simple command determination process (S2008) is executed, and then a simple display setting process (S2009) is executed. Transition to processing.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 38 to 43, details of the above-described command determination process (S2002), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the command determination process.

  In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 38, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2101). If there is no unprocessed new command (S2101: No), The command determination process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2101: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S2003) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S2102), and then the command For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the command type is analyzed (S2103).

  First, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among unprocessed commands (S2104). If there is a display variation pattern command (S2104: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S2105), the process returns to S2101.

  Here, the details of the variation pattern command processing (S2105) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This variation pattern command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. It is set in the buffer 233d (S2201).

  Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed several seconds or more in the main controller 110, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is displayed incorrectly. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S2201, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  If a change display data table corresponding to a change pattern with a long change time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a change effect having a change time shorter than the set display data table is actually generated by the main control device. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another change display is suddenly started, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, as shown in the present embodiment, by setting the display data table buffer 233d with the display data table buffer 233d corresponding to the change pattern with the shortest change time, the change is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the variable effect having time is instructed by the main controller 110, as will be described later, after the variable effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main controller 110 performs the next display. Since the display setting process controls the display of the 3rd symbol display device 81 so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can feel the 3rd symbol display device 81 without any discomfort. You can continue to see changes in the three symbols.

  Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2201 is determined and read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2202).

  Next, based on the variation time of the variation pattern corresponding to the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2201, time data representing the variation time is set in the time counter 233h (S2203), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S2204), and both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S2205). When the processing of S2205 is completed, a pointer value (pointer 233f value) indicating the execution start timing of the notice effect corresponding to the variable display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, and a pointer indicating the execution start timing of the special notice effect The value (the value of the pointer 233f) is read out and stored in the effect timing storage area 233i (S2206), and this process ends.

  By storing the execution start timing of the notice effect and the special notice effect in the effect timing storage area 233i, the notice effect data table or the special notice effect data for the address after the stored timing (value of the pointer 233f) is stored. A notice effect can be easily set simply by adding the contents of the table.

  By executing the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 39), in the display setting processing, the variation set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2201 while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S2204. The drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the display data table, and the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and at the same time, transferred by the processing of S2202. Transfer data information specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the data table buffer 233e, and the necessary sprite image data in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234. Normal To be transferred to the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236, and controls the image controller 237.

  In the display setting process, the time of the variation effect defined in the variation display data table is measured using the time counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S2203, and the variation effect in the variation display data table is completed. If it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in step S2104 that there is no display variation pattern command (S2104: No), it is then determined whether there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S2106). If there is a display variation type command (S2106: Yes), stop type command processing is executed (S2107), and the processing returns to S2101.

  Here, the details of the stop type command process (S2107) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39B is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the stop type command processing, first, stop type table corresponding to stop type information (one of big hit A, big hit B, front / rear outreach, reach other than front / rear out, complete out, chance chance) indicated by the display stop type command. (S2301), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop symbol counter updated every time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 37B) is executed, and the third symbol display device The stop symbol after the fluctuating effect displayed in 81 is finally set (S2302).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of S2302 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flags corresponding to other stop symbols are set. It is set to off (S2303), the stop type command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the variation based on the data table was started. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S2302 is described. In the task process (S2004) described above, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the change was started, the stop symbol set by the process of S2302 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set in S2303, and the specified stop By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address at which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. Note that the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

  In addition, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed several seconds or more in the main controller 110, two or more display stop type commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, so the command determination process is executed. If there are two or more display stop type commands stored in the command buffer area, part of the command will change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command will stop display for mistakenly. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the processing of S2301, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, the stop type is assumed to be completely out of order, and the stop type is determined. Determine the table. As a result, a stop symbol corresponding to complete detachment is set by the processing of S2302.

  If the stop symbol corresponding to the “special symbol jackpot” is set, the third symbol display device 81 actually displays “special symbol” even if it is a “special symbol detachment”. The stop symbol corresponding to “Large Bonus” will be displayed, which may cause the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become a “special symbol jackpot”, possibly reducing the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting a stop symbol corresponding to complete detachment, in actuality, if it is a “special symbol jackpot”, the third symbol display device 81 stops completely detachment. Even if the symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a “special symbol jackpot”, so that the player can be pleased.

  Returning to FIG. 38, the description will be continued. If it is determined that there is no display stop type command in the processing of S2106 (S2106: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display notice effect command among the unprocessed commands (S2108). If there is a display notice effect command for display (S2108: Yes), a notice effect command process for setting the notice effect is executed (S2109), and the process returns to S2101.

  Here, the details of the notice effect command process (S2109) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the notice effect command process. The notice effect command process is a process for setting the type of notice effect notified by the display notice effect command for display received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the notice effect command processing, first, it is determined whether or not the notice effect can be set (S2401). Here, the timing at which the notice effect can be set specifically means a case where the value of the pointer 233f is less than the pointer value stored in the effect timing storage area 233i as the start timing of the notice effect. That is, if it is temporally before the timing at which the notice effect is started in the current variation pattern, it is determined in step S2401 that the notice effect can be set. In order to secure the processing time for setting the notice effect, it may be determined whether a predetermined time before the timing for starting the notice effect is set as a reference time and whether it is before the reference time. . Thus, even if the processing time for setting the notice effect is long, the notice effect setting process is started by the reference time described above, so the notice effect setting process is completed by the timing of starting the notice effect. Can be made.

  In the process of S2401, when it is determined that it is the timing at which the notice effect can be set (S2401: Yes), the notice effect data table corresponding to the type of the notice effect notified by the display notice effect command for display is determined, Data is added after the pointer position corresponding to the notice effect timing in the display data table buffer 233d (S2402), and the process proceeds to S2405. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the timing at which the notice effect can be set (S2401: No), the reselection is continuously determined in the notice effect selection process (S1406) of the audio lamp control device 113, etc. This is a case where the timing at which the display notice effect command is notified exceeds the start timing of the notice effect. In this case, it is determined whether or not it is possible to set a special notice effect that executes the notice effect in a special display mode (S2403).

  Here, the timing at which the special notice effect can be set specifically means that the value of the pointer 233f is less than the pointer value stored in the effect timing storage area 233i as the start time of the special notice effect. . That is, if it is temporally before the timing at which the special notice effect is started in the current variation pattern, it is determined in step S2403 that the special notice effect can be set.

  In the processing of S2403, when it is determined that it is time to set the special notice effect (S2403: Yes), the special effect data table corresponding to the display notice effect command for display is determined, and the special notice effect of the display data table is determined. The pointer position corresponding to the timing is set (S2404), and the process proceeds to S2405. The special notice effect is an effect in which the notice effect is executed in a special display mode, and an effect executed from the start timing of the notice effect based on the notified display notice effect command (for example, a boy at the center of the screen) Is an effect executed in a special display mode (for example, an effect in which a boy is reduced and displayed in the lower left portion of the screen).

  Even if the timing at which the display notice effect command for display is notified by the processing of S2403 and S2404 exceeds the start timing of the notice effect, the special effect different from the notice effect (notification effects AC, specific notice effect) Special notice effects can be displayed in various display modes. As a result, even when the notification timing of the display notice effect command for display is delayed, it is possible to display the special notice effect based on the notified notice effect for display effect while avoiding overlapping display with other effects. As a result, the interest of the player can be improved.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2403, when it is determined that it is not the timing when the special notice effect can be set (S2403: No), the process proceeds to S2405 as it is. In the process of S2405, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S2405), this process ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By this notice effect command processing, the notice effect data table corresponding to the notified notice effect type is combined with the variable display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, thereby easily setting the notice effect. be able to. When combining, the display defined in the notice effect data table for each address after the address (value of pointer 233f) corresponding to the start timing of the notice effect specified in the effect timing storage area 233j. Configured to add content. That is, the display contents after the start timing of the notice effect are defined for each elapsed time in the notice effect data table. By configuring in this way, the display data table storage area 233b can be used more efficiently than in the case where addresses for all variable times are prepared in the notice effect data table.

  Returning to FIG. 38, the description will be continued. If it is determined in step S2108 that there is no display notice effect command for display (S2108: No), it is then determined whether there is a display opening command among unprocessed commands (S2110). If there is a command opening command (S2110: Yes), the opening command process is executed (S2111), and the process returns to S2101.

  Here, the details of the opening command process (S2111) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41A is a flowchart showing the opening command process. This opening command process executes a process corresponding to the opening command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the opening command process, first, an opening display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S2501). Thereafter, a transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2502), and time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the set opening display data table (S2503). Thereafter, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S2504). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S2605), the opening command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Returning to FIG. 38, the description will be continued. If it is determined in step S2110 that there is no display opening command (S2110: No), then it is determined whether there is a display round number command among unprocessed commands (S2112). If there is a round number command for use (S2112: Yes), round number command processing is executed (S2113), and the processing returns to S2101.

  Here, the details of the round number command processing (S2113) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41B is a flowchart showing round number command processing. This round number command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display round number command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the round number command processing, first, a round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data is displayed. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S2601). Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S2602).

  Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2601, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S2603), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S2604). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S2605), the round number command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the processing of S2112 that there is no display round number command (S2112: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display ending command among the unprocessed commands (S2114). If there is an ending command (S2114: Yes), an ending command process is executed (S2115), and the process returns to S2101.

  Here, the details of the ending command process (S2115) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the ending command process. This ending command process is to execute a process corresponding to the display ending command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the ending command processing, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. It is set in the buffer 233d (S2701). Next, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S2702).

  Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S2701, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S2703), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S2704). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S2705), the ending command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the processing of S2114 that there is no display ending command (S2114: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S2116), and the back image is determined. If there is a change command (S2116: Yes), the rear image change command process is executed (S2117), and the process returns to S2101.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 43A, details of the rear image change command processing (S2117) will be described. FIG. 43A is a flowchart showing the rear image change command process. This rear image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the rear image change command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the back image change command processing, first, the back image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting processing (S3303) of the change of the back image accompanying the reception of the back image change command in the ON state is set to ON (S2801). . Then, among the back image discrimination flags provided for each back image type (back A to C), the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is turned on, and other back images The rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the type is set to OFF (S2802), the rear image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the rear image change flag set by the process of S2801 is turned on, the rear image type after the change is specified from the rear image discrimination flag set by the process of S2802. . If the specified back image type is back B or back C, a part of the image data corresponding to the back image is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 as described above. Therefore, the transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the rear image in the predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  Also, in the task processing (S2004), when it is specified that any one of the back surfaces A to C is displayed according to the back surface type of the back image specified in the display data table, the back image discrimination flag set in S2802 The rear image type to be displayed at that time is specified, the range of the rear image to be displayed is specified in accordance with the passage of time, and the image data corresponding to the range of the rear image is stored The type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM are specified.

  Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, two or more back image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, so the command determination process is executed. If there are two or more back image change commands stored in the command buffer area, some of the commands will change due to noise and other commands, and another command will change the back image by mistake. It may be interpreted as a command. In the processing of S2802, if it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received earlier is turned on. Alternatively, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received later may be turned on. Also, any one rear image change command may be extracted, and the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value in the pachinko machine 10, it is preferably set as appropriate according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the processing of S2116 that there is no rear image change command (S2116: No), then it is determined whether there is an error command among unprocessed commands (S2118), and there is an error command. If (S2118: Yes), the error command process is executed (S2119), and the process returns to S2101.

  Here, the details of the error command process (S2119) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43B is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the error command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S2901). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to OFF (S2902). The process ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S2901, the error type generated from the error determination flag set by the process of S2902 is determined, and the error type is dealt with. The processing is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in step S2902, the error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that a player or a hall-related person can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the processing of S2118 that there is no error command (S2118: No), then processing corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S2120), and the processing returns to S2101.

  In the processing of S2101 executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2101: Yes). ), The processing of S2102 to S2120 is executed again. Then, the processing of S2101 to S2120 is repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if it is determined in S2101 that there is no unprocessed new command, this command determination The process ends.

  Note that the simple command determination process (S2008) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 37B) is the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, the commands necessary for displaying the power-on image shown in FIG. 13 from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop. Only the type command is extracted, and the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 39 (a)) and the stop type command process (see FIG. 39 (b)), which are processes corresponding to each command, are executed, For a command, a process for discarding the command is executed without executing the process corresponding to the command.

  Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 39A) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S2201. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main moving image area 235a and the power-on variation moving image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S2202, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233b and the content is cleared.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 44 to 46, the details of the display setting process (S2003), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 44, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S3001). If the new command flag is not on, that is, if it is off (S3001: No), In the command determination process executed first, it is determined that a new command has not been processed, the process of S3002 to S3004 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S3005. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S3001: Yes), it is determined that a new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after setting the new command flag to off (S3002), S3003 to S3004. By this process, the process corresponding to the new command is executed.

  In the process of S3003, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S3003). If the error occurrence flag is on (S3003: Yes), a warning image setting process is executed (S3004).

  Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for developing image data that causes the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image corresponding to the error that has occurred. First, an error determination flag is referred to, and all error determinations that are set to ON are performed. The warning image data for displaying the warning image of the error corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S3101).

  In the task processing (S2004), the type of sprite (display object) constituting the warning image is specified based on the developed warning image data, and the display coordinate position, the enlargement ratio, and the rotation angle for each sprite. Various parameters necessary for drawing are determined.

  In the warning image setting process, after the process of S3101, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S3102), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. After the warning image setting process (S3004) or in the process of S3003, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, is off (S3003: No), the process proceeds to S3005.

  In S3005, pointer update processing is executed (S3005). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update processing acquires the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233d and transfer data table buffer 233e. This is a process for updating the pointer 233f for designating the power address.

  In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S3201). That is, the updating process is performed so that the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 every time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the start information is described in the address “0000H”, and the substance of each data is specified after the address “0001H”. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 as it is stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

  After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the processing of S3201, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. Is discriminated (S3202). As a result, if it is End information (S3202: Yes), it means that in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the entity data is described.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S3203). If the display data table is a demonstration display data table (S3203: Yes), the display data is displayed. The time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counter 233h (S3204), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S3205), and this process ends. Return to the display setting process. Thereby, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed in order from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3203, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the display data table for demonstration (S3203: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 ( In step S3206, the process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the display data table for demonstration, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which End information is described. Since the drawing contents of the above are always developed, the third image display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S3202, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S3202: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, returning to FIG. 44, the description will be continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents at the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3006). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing image developed in the processing of S3006 together with the previously developed warning image and the display coordinates for each sprite. Various parameters necessary for drawing such as position, magnification, and rotation angle are determined.

  Next, 1 is subtracted from the value of the time counter 233h (S3007), and it is determined whether or not the value of the time counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S3008). When the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S3008: No), the display setting process is terminated as it is and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is equal to or less than 0 (S3008: Yes), it means that the production effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing for ending the variable display and performing the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the fixed display flag is on. (S3009).

  As a result, if the confirmed display flag is off (S3009: No), the confirmed display data table has not been performed yet, and the confirmed display effect is at the timing for performing the confirmed display, so the confirmed display data table is first stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the contents are cleared by writing Null data into the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3011). Then, time data corresponding to the presentation time in the final display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3012), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3013). Then, after the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S3014), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S3015), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fixed symbol display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. Thus, the drawing content can be set. Moreover, the effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 can be easily changed into a fixed display effect only by changing the display data table set to the display data table buffer 233b to a fixed display data table. And, compared with the case where the display contents are changed by starting another program as in the prior art, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore, the MPU 231 is not greatly loaded. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S3015 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes depending on the stop symbol of the variation effect performed one time before. In the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. The symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuating effect performed one time before is described until a predetermined time has elapsed since the start. In the task process (S2004), until the predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation, the previous stop pattern determination flag set in S3015 is specified and the stop effect of the variation effect performed immediately before is specified. The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3009, if the confirmed display flag is on (S3009: Yes), it is determined whether or not the demo display flag is on (S3016). If the demonstration display flag is off (S3016: No), it means that the value of the time counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display effect, so that the demonstration display data table is displayed as the display data table. The data is set in the buffer 233d (S3017), and then the null data is written into the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S3018). Then, time data corresponding to the production time in the demonstration display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3019). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3020), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S3021), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  As a result, when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect or the opening command is not received after the final display effect is finished, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing content can be set so that is displayed.

  In the process of S3016, if the demonstration display flag is on (S3016: Yes), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the final display effect is ended, and the demonstration effect is ended. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt process. In this case, as described above, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process. The demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

  Note that, in the simple display setting process (S2009) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 37B), the same process as the display setting process is performed. However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the variation effect by the power-on variation image ends, one of the power-on variation images corresponding to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time. The display data table that stipulates that the image (one of FIGS. 13B and 13C) is stopped and displayed is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 47 and 48, details of the above-described transfer setting process (S2005), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. First, FIG. 47A is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3301). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3301: Yes), all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The process is executed (S3302), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thereby, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on as a result of the processing of S3301, that is, if it is off (S3301: No), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video. It is transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S3303), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thus, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S3302), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2005) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 47 (b). FIG. 47B is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S3302).

  In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer untransferred image data is issued to the image controller 237 (S3401), and if a transfer instruction is transmitted (S3401: Yes). Further, based on the transfer instruction, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 has ended (S3402). In the process of S3402, when an image data transfer instruction is given to the image controller 237 and a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined in S3402 that the transfer process has not been completed (S3402: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S3402: Yes), the process proceeds to S3403. Also, as a result of the process of S3401, when the transfer instruction of untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S3401: No), the process proceeds to S3403.

  In the process of S3403, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S3403). A transfer instruction to the image controller 237 is set so that the image data to be transferred resides from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S3404), and the resident image transfer setting process ends.

  As a result, transfer data information relating to untransferred resident object image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the head address and final address of the character ROM 234 storing the resident target image data, transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and transfer destination (transferred here). The head address of an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 in which the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 236. To the designated address of the resident video RAM 236. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  If all the resident target image data has been transferred as a result of the process of S3403 (S3403: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S3405), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated. Thus, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 37B), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S2008 in FIG. 37B) and the simple display setting process (see S2009 in FIG. 37B). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 38 to 43) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 44 to 46) are executed, normal image drawing is set, and the third symbol display device 81 has The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 48) (see S3301: No in FIG. 47A).

  By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 removes all the resident images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 excluding the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 performs control so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is held without being overwritten while the power is turned on. Thus, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

  Therefore, after all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed at. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed during image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be displayed immediately on the third symbol display device 81 by drawing the image.

  In particular, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently displayed images such as a back image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, the main controller 110, the sound lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114 are displayed. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately after the display is determined by, for example, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the player can perform various operations performed at an arbitrary timing. The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Next, a normal image transfer setting process (S3303), which is a process of the transfer setting process (S2005) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S3303).

  In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S3005) of the display setting process (S2003) executed earlier is used. Information described in the indicated address is acquired (S3501). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S3502). If it is transfer data information (S3502: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored from the transfer data information. Start address (storage source start address), final address (storage source final address), and transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) start address are extracted and stored in a transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( In step S3503), a transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the on state is set to on (S3504), and the process proceeds to step S3505.

  In the process of S3502, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S3502: No), the processes of S3503 and S3504 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S3505. In the processing of S3505, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer of image data has been completed (S3505), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S3505: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 has been completed based on the transfer instruction (S3506).

  In the process of S3506, when an image data transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 and a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined in S3506 that the transfer process has not ended (S3506: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S3506: Yes), the process proceeds to S3507. Also, as a result of the process of S3505, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer process (S3505: No), the process proceeds to S3507.

  In the process of S3507, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S3507). If the transfer start flag is on (S3507: Yes), there is image data to be transferred, so the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (S3508), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S3503 is set as the transfer target image data, and the process proceeds to S3513. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S3507: No), it is then determined whether or not the back image change flag 233w is on (S3509).

  If the back image change flag 233w is on (S3509: Yes), it means that the back image is changed. Therefore, after the back image change flag 233w is set to off (S3510), it is provided for each back image type. Of the back image discrimination flag 233x, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as transfer target image data (S3511). Furthermore, the head address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag 233x in the on state, and the transfer destination ( The head address of the normal video RAM 236) is acquired (S3512), and the process proceeds to S3513.

  If the back image change flag 233w is not on but off (S3509: No) in the processing of S3509, there is no image data to be transferred, and the normal image transfer setting processing is terminated as it is.

  If the back image discrimination flag in the on state is that of the back A, the corresponding image data is all resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and therefore the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236. There is no data. Therefore, in the process of S3515, if the back image discrimination flag in the on state is that of the back A, the normal image transfer process is terminated as it is.

  In the process of S3513, it is determined whether or not the transfer target image data is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3513). The determination in the process of S3513 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233j. That is, when the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data determination flag 233j and the storage state is "ON", the image data of the sprite that is the transfer target is the normal video. If it is determined that the image is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is “OFF”, it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  If the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing in S3513 (S3513: No), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Then, the normal image transfer setting process is finished as it is. Thereby, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

  On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S3513 (S3513: Yes), a transfer instruction for the transfer target image data is set (S3514). Thereby, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 stores the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the transfer target image, transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and transfer destination (transfer here). The start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 to store the image data of the transfer target image is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the process of S3514, the stored image data determination flag 233j is updated (S3515), and the normal transfer setting process is terminated. As described above, the stored image data determination flag 233j is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “on” and substituting the same image storage area 236a as that one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprites to be stored in the area to “off”.

  As described above, by executing the normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the command determination process executed earlier, and as a result, the display stop type command is used. When it is determined that the stop type information shown is a jackpot stop type, the image data used in the opening effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the command determination process executed earlier, the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in the rear image. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  In the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. As a result, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can do.

  In the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is determined in accordance with the display data table. When drawing a sprite, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 49, details of the above-described drawing process (S2006), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

  In the drawing process, various sprite types constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2004) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information) , Color information, filter designation information) and the transfer list set by the transfer setting process (S2005), the drawing list shown in FIG. 18 is generated (S3601). In other words, in the process of S3601, the type of storage RAM in which the image data of the sprite is stored and the address are specified for each sprite from the type of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2004). Then, the parameters necessary for the sprite determined by the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, after rearranging each sprite in the order of the sprite that should be placed on the front side from the sprite that should be placed on the back side in the image for one frame, the details for each sprite in the order of the sprite after the rearrangement As a drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing a storage RAM type and address where sprite image data is stored, and parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2005), the head address (storage source head address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (storage source final address) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

  As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 Depending on the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k are transmitted to the image controller (S3602). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 1 including information for instructing to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing to expand the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

  Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images sequentially from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list, and develops the image by overwriting the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  Further, when transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data are determined from the transfer data information. ) And the destination address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the source address to the end address of the storage source are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination head address of the normal video RAM 236 in anticipation of the normal video RAM 236 being in an unused state. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on a drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and an image is drawn according to the drawing list.

  The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer instructed by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the developed image in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, while developing the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81, and the drawing process and the display process are processed simultaneously in parallel. Can do.

  In the drawing process, after the process of S3602, the drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated (S3603). Then, the drawing process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated by inverting the value, that is, by setting the value to “1” when the value is “0” and setting it to “0” when the value is “1”. Done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, the drawing list is transmitted based on the V interrupt signal executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed. This is performed every time the drawing process of the embedding process (see FIG. 37B) is executed. Thus, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for the remaining minutes is read out. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously display the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing the image for one frame.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, when the predetermined determination (determination of the type of the notice effect to be displayed) is performed, the determination is performed again at a predetermined ratio (6/256). (The notice effect is reselected). In addition, the number of determination values corresponding to reselection is set so that the number of determination values from which determination results are derived without being reselected becomes a clear number (250). That is, when the probability that each determination result (notice effect A to C) is determined in a predetermined determination is expressed as a percentage (percentage), it is set to be an integer percentage (zero after the decimal point).

  Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines perform various types of lottery, such as a lottery for winning or not based on winning of a game ball at a start winning opening, and a lottery for display effects. In these lotteries, different lottery results are obtained according to the random number values lottery selected, and therefore randomness can be given to the lottery results.

  However, since random numbers used for various lotteries are generated by a dedicated IC or the like, the lottery parameter is generally in bit units (power of 2) according to the specifications of the IC. For this reason, when the probability of each lottery result is converted to a percentage, it is normal that a fraction (decimal point) is generated. That is, the percentage could not be converted to an integer. For this reason, it may be difficult to intuitively understand the lottery probability for each lottery result. Also, when designing a gaming machine, there is a case where an integer percentage is once set as a probability target and the number of random numbers closest to the set target is calculated. There was a risk of becoming.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the random number value determined to be reselected is distributed so that the probability parameter in the predetermined lottery is 250, which is a multiple of 50, a minimum of 2% (1 of the parameter) / 50) The probability of each lottery result can be sorted by the percentage. That is, since the percentage of the probability of each lottery result can be easily converted to an integer, a gaming machine in which the lottery result is intuitively easy to understand can be provided. In addition, by making the percentage of the probability of each lottery result an integer, it is possible to efficiently design the probability of each lottery result at the time of design.

  In the present embodiment, an IC that generates any one of 8 bits (256 values) is employed as the production random number generation IC 800, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, an IC capable of generating a 10-bit (1024 types) value may be employed. In this case, in order to convert the percentage into an integer, for example, 1000 values that are multiples of 100 are used for selection of the notice effect, and when 24 values different from the 1000 values are obtained, the re-lottery is performed. It may be configured to do. Then, each effect may be associated with the number of random values (judgment values) as a minimum unit of 10 (1/100 of the population). By configuring in this way, since the percentage of the probability of each lottery result can be set as an integer value in 1% increments, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the probability is easy to understand and easy to design. . Further, for example, an IC having a bit number smaller than 8 bits (for example, 5 bits) may be adopted. In this case, out of 128 random numbers that can be generated by the IC, 100 values may be used for selection of the notice effect, and the remaining 28 values may be associated with the redraw. Also in this case, since the percentage can be converted to an integer, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the probability is easily understood and the design is easy to perform. It should be noted that the percentage is not limited to being made into an integer, but may of course be in units of 0.1%.

  In the present embodiment, the random number generated by the random number generation IC (so-called hardware random number) is used as the effect random number. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may naturally be configured to use a random number value generated by software processing (so-called software random number).

  In the present embodiment, when the lottery for the notice effect is executed, the reselection is determined at a predetermined ratio (6/256). However, the lottery for which the reselection can be decided is a lottery for the notice effect. It is not limited to. For example, the reselection may be determined at a predetermined rate in the lottery when selecting the variation pattern type from the variation pattern selection table 222a. Further, the lottery that can determine reselection is not limited to the lottery executed in the sound lamp control device 113. For example, a reselection may be selected at a predetermined ratio when a lottery of whether or not a special symbol is a big win or when a lottery type is drawn. With this configuration, when the probability of jackpot, the probability of each jackpot type, etc. are expressed as percentages, they can be expressed as integer values. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine whose specifications are easier to understand.

  In the present embodiment, when “reselection” is determined 10 times or more in the lottery for determining the notice effect, the lottery for determining the notice effect is terminated, and a specific notice effect (which is different from normal) However, the number of times to determine that the lottery is terminated is not limited to 10 and can be arbitrarily determined. For example, by setting the number more than 10 times, it is possible to more reliably determine any type of the notice effect (notice effects AC). Also, for example, by reducing the number of times less than 10, even when “reselection” is continuously determined, the lottery of the mode of the notification effect can be terminated with a smaller number of determinations, so the notification effect is determined. Can be shortened.

  In the present embodiment, the notice effect previously notified from the sound lamp control device 113 is configured to start at the timing (value of the pointer 233f) defined in the effect timing storage area 233i. It is not something that can be done. For example, the voice lamp control device 113 may execute a process for determining the notice effect when it is determined that the start timing of the notice effect has come. The display control device 114 may be configured to immediately start displaying the notified notice effect. With this configuration, the timing for notifying the type of the notice effect changes according to the number of times “re-selection” is determined in the process of selecting the notice effect, so that the timing for starting the notice effect can be varied. it can. That is, since not only the type of the notice effect but also the start timing can be varied, the interest of the player in the game can be further improved. Furthermore, when “reselection” is determined in order to give variations to the timing of starting the notice effect, the process of selecting the notice effect is executed again after a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed. You may make it do.

Second Embodiment
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 50 to 63. In the first embodiment described above, the “reselection” is determined at a predetermined ratio (6/256) when the audio lamp control device 113 draws the type of the notice effect. Further, the number of determination values corresponding to “reselection” is set so that the number of determination values from which determination results are derived without being reselected is a perfect number (for example, a multiple of 50). . That is, when the probability that each determination result (notice effect A to C) is determined in a predetermined determination is expressed as a percentage (percentage), it is set to be an integer percentage (zero after the decimal point).

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, “reselection” is determined at a predetermined ratio (6/256) in a part of the lottery (variation pattern lottery) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. It is composed. Thereby, in the lottery (variation pattern lottery) in the main controller 110, when the probability that each determination result (each variation pattern) is determined is expressed as a percentage (percentage), an integer percentage (zero after the decimal point) It becomes.

  In addition, when a lottery result corresponding to “reselection” is continuously obtained and the timing of notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of the variation pattern is delayed, the sound lamp control device 113 performs a specific effect (weight progress effect). Is configured to run. While “re-selection” continues, the lottery result is indeterminate, so the variation time is not determined. That is, the display of the variation pattern cannot be started. In this case, by executing a specific effect (weight progress effect), even if the lottery result has been indefinitely long ("reselection" continues many times), the gaming machine operates normally. The player can be made aware that Therefore, the game can be performed with peace of mind.

  The pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment is structurally different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in that the special-purpose random number generation IC 900 and the general-purpose random number generation IC 901 are input / output of the main controller 110. It is electrically connected to the port 205, the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 are partially changed, and the RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp controller 113 is changed. The partial change is executed, the partial processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, and the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed. A part of the processing is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the first embodiment, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

<Electric Configuration in Second Embodiment>
First, an electrical configuration in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 50, in this embodiment, in addition to the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, a special-purpose random number generation IC 900 and a general-purpose random number generation IC 901 are connected to the input / output port 205 of the main controller 110. And are electrically connected. The special figure random number generation IC 900 is used to generate various counter values (random number values) acquired based on the start winning. Further, the general-purpose random number generation IC 901 is used to generate a counter value (random number value) acquired based on the passage of a sphere through the through gate 67. That is, in place of the various counters (first random number counter C1, first hit type counter C2, stop type selection counter C3, variation type counter CS1, second random number counter C4) stored in the RAM 203 in the first embodiment. Thus, the counter value (random number value) used for various lotteries (determination) executed in the main controller 110 is obtained from an external IC. With this configuration, the storage area for storing various counter values in the RAM 203 can be reduced, so that the capacity of the RAM 203 can be saved. In addition, since the process of updating various counter values can be omitted, the processing load on the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 can be reduced. In the second embodiment, the effect random number generation IC 800 in the first embodiment is abolished.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 51, random number values (register values) generated by the special-purpose random number generation IC 900 and the general-purpose random number generation IC 901 will be described. As shown in FIG. 51, the special-purpose random number generation IC 900 is provided with four types of registers (a first random number register R1, a first per type register R2, a stop type selection register R3, and a variation type register RS1). Yes. Each of these registers plays the same role as the random number storage unit of the production random number generation IC 800 in the first embodiment. That is, each register stores a random value generated by the random number generation unit corresponding to each register, and outputs a random value to the outside when there is an instruction to read the random value.

  The random number value (register value) updated in the first per-random number register R1 is used to determine whether or not it is a special symbol jackpot. In other words, the register value of the first per-random number register R1 corresponds to the first per-random number counter C1 in the first embodiment, and the random number values defined in the first per-random number table 202a (see FIG. 8A) ( Is compared with the judgment value). The first random number register R1 stores a random value in the range of 0 to 255. Further, the stored value is updated at a frequency of 200 μs twice (cycle of 200 kHz), for example. For other registers, the update frequency of the stored value is the same as that of the first random number register R1, and only the range of stored values is different.

  The register value updated in the first hit type register R2 is used to select the special symbol jackpot type. That is, the value of the first hit type register R2 corresponds to the first hit type counter C2 in the first embodiment, and is a random value defined in the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 8B). Is compared with the judgment value). This first hit type register R2 stores a random value in the range of 0-127.

  The register value updated in the stop type selection register R3 is used to select an outage stop type in the special symbol. That is, the value of the stop type selection register R3 corresponds to the stop type selection counter C3 in the first embodiment, and is compared with a random value (determination value) defined in a stop type selection table (not shown) to display a special symbol. The stop type is determined (selected). The stop type selection register R3 stores a random value in the range of 0 to 127.

  The register value updated in the variation type register RS1 is used to select a variation pattern (variation time). That is, the value of the variation type register RS1 corresponds to the value of the variation type counter CS1 in the first embodiment, and is a random value (determination) defined in the variation pattern table 202d (see FIGS. 53A to 53C). Value) and the type (variation time) of the variation pattern is determined. A random value in the range of 0 to 255 is stored in the variation type selection register RS1. Note that the random number values (register values) acquired from the respective registers (the first per random number register R1, the first per type classification register R2, the stop type selection register R3, and the variation type register RS1) of the special figure random number generation IC 900 are as follows. After being temporarily stored in the figure counter temporary storage area 203j, it is transferred to an empty area of the special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a. That is, the special-purpose counter temporary storage area 203j includes the first per-random number counter buffer, the first per-type counter buffer, the stop type selection counter buffer, and the variation type counter buffer (see FIG. 6) of the counter buffer 203y in the first embodiment. This is a storage area corresponding to (see).

  The regular random number generation IC 901 is provided with one type of register (second random number register R4). The register value updated in the second per-random number register R4 is used to determine whether or not a normal symbol is hit. That is, the value stored in the second per-random number register R4 corresponds to the second per-random number counter C4 in the first embodiment, and the random number specified in the second per-random number table 202c (see FIG. 8C). It is compared with a numerical value (determination value) to determine whether or not it is a normal symbol. The second random number register R4 stores a random value in the range of 0 to 255.

  Note that the random number value (register value) acquired from the second random number register R4 of the random number generating IC 901 for normal use is temporarily stored in the general counter temporary storage area 203k, and then the normal symbol holding ball storage area. It is transferred to a free area 203b. That is, the temporary counter temporary storage area 203k is a storage area corresponding to the second random number counter buffer in the counter buffer 203y in the first embodiment.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the various determinations executed in the main controller 110 are performed by the random numbers generated by the special-purpose random number generator IC 900 and the general-purpose random number generator IC 901 provided outside the main controller 110. It is configured to execute based on (hardware random number). With this configuration, the storage area for storing various counter values in the RAM 203 can be reduced, so that the capacity of the RAM 203 can be saved. In addition, since the process of updating various counter values can be omitted, the processing load on the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, a random number generation IC (a special-purpose random number generation IC 900 and a general-purpose random number generation IC 901) in which random number values are updated (generated) at a frequency of twice every 10 μs (cycle of 200 kHz) is used. However, this is not a limitation. For example, a random number generation IC that can update (generate) a random number value when acquiring a value from each random number generation IC may be used. As a result, the number of times the random number value is updated (generated) in the random number generation IC can be minimized, so that power consumption can be reduced.

  In this embodiment, a random number generation IC (a special-purpose random number generation IC 900 and a general-purpose random number generation IC 901) that can acquire a random value that is a random value every time it is updated (generated) is used. It is not limited to. For example, by using a random number generation IC that updates a value one by one at a short time interval (for example, 1 μs), the timing of acquiring a value from the random number generation IC becomes irregular. Of course, it may be obtained.

  Next, the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 52A, in the RAM 203 of this embodiment, a main reselection counter 203h and a main reselection flag 203i are added to the configuration of the RAM 203 in the first embodiment. Further, in place of the counter buffer 203y, a special-purpose counter temporary storage area 203j and a general-purpose counter temporary storage area 203k are provided.

  The main reselection counter 203h is a counter that indicates the number of times “reselection” has been continuously selected in a predetermined determination (determination of fluctuation pattern) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, when a variation pattern is determined based on the value of the variation type register RS1 and the variation type selection table 202d (see FIGS. 53A to 53C), a predetermined pattern is used. “Reselection” is selected at the ratio (6/256). When this “reselection” is selected, the random number value (the value of the variation type counter RS1) used for determining the variation pattern is the same as when “reselection” is selected when selecting the notice effect in the first embodiment. Is newly obtained, and the variation pattern (variation time) is determined again based on the new random value. Here, since the variation pattern cannot be started unless the process of selecting the variation pattern (variation time) is completed, the variation pattern (variation time) needs to be determined quickly. For this reason, in this embodiment, when “reselection” is determined, the value of the variation type register RS1 is immediately acquired again without performing other processing, and the variation pattern (variation time) is determined. To do. However, if “re-selection” continues for too many times, the period during which other processing (for example, start winning process or through gate passing process) is not executed becomes longer, and for example, a start winning can be detected. There is a possibility that the passage of the through gate 67 cannot be detected. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the number of times “reselection” is continuously determined is counted by the main reselection counter 203h, and when “reselection” continues for a predetermined number of times (for example, 4 times). Is configured such that after other processing executed by the MPU 201 is executed once, the value of the variation type register RS1 is acquired again to determine the variation pattern (variation time). With this configuration, it is possible to execute a process for quickly determining a variation pattern within a range that does not affect other processes.

  The main reselection counter 203h has an initial value set to 0, and “reselection” is determined in the process of selecting (determining) the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol variation start process 2 (see FIG. 56). Each time the value is added, 1 is added to the value (see S333 in FIG. 56). Further, “reselection” is continuously determined four times or more, and is initialized to 0 when the process for selecting (determining) the variation pattern (variation time) is interrupted (see S336 in FIG. 56). .

  Here, with reference to FIG. 53, the details of the variation pattern table 202d which is a data table in which “reselection” is associated with a part of the random value (determination value) will be described. Similar to the variation pattern table 202d in the first embodiment, the variation pattern table 202d is a data table used to select a variation pattern, but the specified content is changed from the first embodiment. First, FIG. 53 (a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 53A, in the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 of this embodiment, “reselection” is associated with a part of determination values (random values). In addition, by distributing the determination value (random number value) to “reselection”, the distribution of the determination value (random number value) to other determination results is changed.

  Specifically, a range of “0 to 24” as the determination value is associated with a variation pattern of various types of normal reach (30 seconds), and a range of “25 to 174” is a variation pattern of various types of super reach (60 seconds). Are associated, and various special reach (90 seconds) variation patterns are associated with the range of “175 to 249”. Then, “re-selection” is associated with the remaining determination values “250 to 255”. By setting the number of determination values (random numbers) for which “reselection” is determined to be “250 to 255”, various types of normal reach (30 seconds), various types of super reach (60 seconds), and various types of special reach ( The total number of random values for determining (90 seconds) can be 250 (0 to 249). 1% corresponds to 2.5 random values (judgment values) (250/100), so if you assign random values (judgment values) with 5 (2%) as the minimum unit, the percentage of probability is Can be an integer value.

  In this embodiment, 25 (5 × 5) judgment values of “0 to 24” are assigned to various types of normal reach (30 seconds), and “25 to 174” are assigned to various types of super reach (60 seconds). 150 (5 × 30) determination values are allocated, and 75 (5 × 15) determination values of “175 to 249” are allocated to various special reach (90 seconds). Therefore, the probability of selecting various types of normal reach is 10% (2% × 5), the probability of selecting various types of super reach (60 seconds) is 60% (2% × 30), and various types of special reach (90 seconds) Is 30% (2% × 15). That is, random values (judgment values) are allocated so that the percentage of the rate at which each variation pattern is selected becomes an integer value. Thereby, since it is possible to prevent (suppress) a fraction (decimal point) from occurring in the percentage, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having a specification that is easier to understand. Also, at the time of designing, it is possible to efficiently allocate the probabilities that are the results of the determinations.

  Similarly, the random value (determination value) is also used for the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 53B) and the variation (probability) variation pattern table 202d3 (see FIG. 53C). “Reselection” is associated with the range of “250 to 255”. That is, the variation pattern (variation time) is determined only when there are 250 (0 to 249) values out of 256 random numbers (determination values). Further, by setting the number of random numbers associated with each variation pattern to be all multiples of 5, the percentage of the probability that each variation pattern (variation time) is selected is converted to an integer. This makes it possible to make the probability more easily understandable regardless of whether it is a big hit or a miss.

  Returning to FIG. 52A, the description will be continued. The main reselection flag 203i is a flag indicating whether or not “reselection” has been continuously determined a predetermined number of times (four times) or more in the process of selecting (determining) the variation pattern (variation time). If the main reselection flag 203i is on, it means that “reselection” has been continuously determined four times or more, and if it is off, it means that the number of consecutive “reselection” is less than four. means. In the main reselection process (see FIG. 59) executed in the timer interrupt process 2 (see FIG. 54) in this embodiment, the main reselection flag 203i is referred to (see S4101 in FIG. 59), and the main reselection process is performed. If the selection flag 203i is on, processing for obtaining a new random number value from the variation type register RS1 and determining a variation pattern (variation time) (see S4102 to S4107 in FIG. 59) is executed.

  As described above, the special-purpose counter temporary storage area 203j and the general-purpose counter temporary storage area 203k are temporary storage areas for temporarily storing register values in place of the counter buffer 203y (FIG. 51). reference). Each random number value (register value) acquired from the special symbol random number generation IC 900 is stored in the special symbol counter temporary storage area 203j and then transferred to an empty area of the special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a. The random number value (register value) acquired from the general-purpose random number generation IC 901 is stored in the general-purpose counter temporary storage area 203k and then transferred to an empty area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 52B, the configuration of the RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 52, the RAM 223 in the second embodiment has a weight measurement counter 223g and a weight measurement flag 223h added to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first embodiment.

  The weight measurement counter 223g ends the change display when the change display (change pattern) ends in a state where at least one change is held (the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b is 1 or more). It is a counter for measuring the elapsed time since then. The weight measurement counter 223g is incremented by one in the weight progress effect process (see FIG. 63) until the next variation display is started after the stop command is received in a state where the number of held balls is 1 or more. . Since the weight progress effect process (see FIG. 63) is executed every 1 millisecond in the main process 2 (see FIG. 61) of the sound lamp control device 113, the weight measurement counter 223g is set to 1 every 1 millisecond. It is added one by one. In the present embodiment, in the weight progress effect process (see FIG. 63), the value of the weight measurement counter 223g is referred to (see S4205 in FIG. 63), and a predetermined period (1050 milliseconds) has elapsed since the last fluctuation ended. If the next variation that has been suspended is not started even after the passage (the variation pattern command is not output from the main control device 110), a specific effect (weight elapsed effect) is executed (FIG. 63). S4206).

  Here, the case where the fluctuation pattern command is not output from the main control device 110 even after the predetermined period has elapsed means that the main control device 110 takes time to determine the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time). Etc. That is, in the process of determining the variation pattern from the variation pattern table 202d, “re-selection” is continuously determined, and a new random value (determination value) is obtained from the variation type register RS1 and defined in the variation pattern table 202d. This is the case where the process of comparing with the determination value is repeated endlessly. If the variation pattern (variation time) is not determined, the variation pattern command cannot be set from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113, so that the previous variation is completed as the “reselection” is repeated. After that, the period from the start of the next change becomes longer. In this case, if the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to wait until the fluctuation pattern command is received, the third symbol is stopped and the reserved symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. Nevertheless, since the display content of the third symbol display device 81 does not change, there is a possibility that the player may feel uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when a predetermined period (1050 milliseconds) elapses without starting the next fluctuation after the previous fluctuation pattern (fluctuation display) ends, a specific effect (weight) (Progress effect) is executed. As a result, the display content of the third symbol display device 81 can be varied, so that the player can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is operating normally even if the next variation effect is not started. it can. In addition, as a weight progress effect, even if a variation pattern command is notified immediately after the effect is started, the effect has little influence on the variation time notified by the variation pattern command (an effect that can be ended immediately). Is executed. More specifically, for example, until the change pattern command is notified, an effect in which one or more stop symbols shine is executed. By executing a simple effect without a story (such as an effect where the design shines), even if the change pattern command is received during the effect and the change is started, the player can hardly feel uncomfortable. Moreover, it can be recognized as if it was a sign of the start of fluctuation.

  The weight measurement flag 223h is a flag indicating whether or not the previous variation has been completed and the variation pattern command has not been notified when the number of reserved balls is one or more. That is, it indicates whether or not it is a period of time measurement (counting) by the weight measurement counter 223g. If this weight measurement flag 223h is on, it means that the previous variation effect has ended and the next variation pattern command has not been notified, so during this time the main process 2 (see FIG. 61) is executed. Each time the value is updated, the value of the weight measurement counter 223g is updated (see S4202 in FIG. 63). On the other hand, if the weight measurement flag 223h is off, the wait measurement counter 223g is not updated because it is not a period of waiting for the change pattern command to be notified from the main controller 110. The weight measurement flag 223h is set to ON when a stop command is received from the main controller 110 and there is a holding ball (S1335 in FIG. 62). Further, it is set to OFF every time a variation pattern command is received from main controller 110 (see S1332 in FIG. 62). With this weight measurement flag 223h, the weight measurement counter 223g can be accurately updated.

<Regarding Control Process of Main Controller in Second Embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS. 54 to 60. First, the timer interrupt process 2 executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The timer interrupt process 2 in the second embodiment is executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 as in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19) in the first embodiment. For example, every 2 milliseconds. It is a periodic process executed at

  Of the timer interrupt process 2 in the second embodiment, the processes in S101, S106, S108, and S109 are respectively S101, S104, S106, and S108 of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19) in the first embodiment. , And the same process as each process of S109 is executed.

  Further, in the timer interrupt process 2 (see FIG. 54) in the present embodiment, the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 20), the start winning process (see FIG. 22), and the through gate passing process (see FIG. 24) in the first embodiment. ), A special symbol variation process 2 (S104), a start winning process 2 (S105), and a through gate passing process 2 (S107) are executed. Details of these processes will be described later with reference to FIGS. Furthermore, in the timer interrupt process 2 (see FIG. 54) in the present embodiment, when the process of S108 is completed, the process of determining the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) (special symbol fluctuation start process 2) is a predetermined number of times or more (four times). As described above, when reselection is determined, the main reselection process, which is a process for determining the variation pattern (variation time), is executed (S131), and the process proceeds to S109. Details of the main reselection process (S131) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the special symbol variation process 2 (S104) in the second embodiment will be described. This special symbol variation process 2 (S104) is similar to the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 20) in the first embodiment, and the special symbol (first symbol) variation display performed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol performed in the third symbol display device 81.

  Of the special symbol variation process 2 (S104) in the second embodiment, in each process of S201 to S207 and S209 to S218, S201 to S207 and S209 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 20) in the first embodiment, respectively. The same process as each process of S218 is executed. In the special symbol variation process 2 (see FIG. 55) in the second embodiment, when it is determined that there is no variation in the process of S202 (S202: No), a predetermined time from the previous stop display of the third symbol. It is determined whether or not (one second) has elapsed (S231). If it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed (S231: No), the present process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S231, when it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed (S231: Yes), the processes of S203 to S208 are executed. In the process of S208 in the present embodiment, a special symbol variation start process 2 (S208) is executed instead of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 21) in the first embodiment. Details of the special symbol variation process 2 (S208) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 56, the special symbol variation start process 2 (S208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing special symbol variation start processing 2 (S208) in the second embodiment. This special symbol variation start process 2 (S208) is similar to the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 21) in the first embodiment, based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area. ”Or“ exclusion of special symbol ”(whether or not) is determined, and the effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variation effect performed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81 is determined. Process.

  Of the special symbol variation start processing 2 (S208) in the second embodiment, in each processing of S301 to S311, each of the processing of S301 to S311 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 21) in the first embodiment, respectively. The same process is executed. Further, in the special symbol variation start process 2 (see FIG. 56), when the processing of S307 or S309 is completed, the variation pattern table 202d (see FIGS. 53A to 53C) in the processing of S307 or S309, It is determined whether or not “reselection” has been determined (selected) based on the value of the variation type register RS1 (S331). If it is determined that “reselection” is determined in the process of S331 (S331: Yes), the value of the variation type register RS1 is newly acquired from the special-purpose random number generation IC 900 (S332), and the main re- 1 is added to the value of the selection counter 203h (S333). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the main reselection counter 203h is 4 or more (S334). If the value is less than 4 (S334: No), each of S305 to S309 for selecting the variation pattern is performed. Run the process again.

  On the other hand, in the process of S334, when it is determined that the value of the main reselection counter 203h is 4 or more (S334: Yes), the process of repeating the reselection of the variation pattern is temporarily ended, and the main reselection flag 203i is set. Set to ON (S335). Then, the main reselection counter 203h is initialized to 0 (S336), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S331, when it is determined that “reselection” is determined in the process of S307 or S309 (S331: No), the process proceeds to S310. With the special symbol variation start process 2 (see FIG. 56), the variation pattern is determined, and when “reselection” is determined, the variation pattern reselection can be repeated. Here, since the variation pattern cannot be started unless the process of selecting the variation pattern (variation time) is completed, the variation pattern (variation time) needs to be determined quickly. For this reason, in this embodiment, when “reselection” is determined, the value of the variation type register RS1 is immediately acquired again without performing other processing, and the variation pattern (variation time) is determined. To do. However, if “re-selection” continues for too many times, the period during which other processing (for example, start winning process or through gate passing process) is not executed becomes longer, and for example, a start winning can be detected. There is a possibility that the passage of the through gate 67 cannot be detected. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the number of times “reselection” is continuously determined is counted by the main reselection counter 203h, and when “reselection” continues for a predetermined number of times (for example, 4 times). Is configured such that after other processing executed by the MPU 201 is executed once, the value of the variation type register RS1 is acquired again to determine the variation pattern (variation time). With this configuration, it is possible to execute a process for quickly determining a variation pattern within a range that does not affect other processes.

  Next, the start winning process 2 (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the start winning process 2 (S105) in the second embodiment.

  Of the start winning process (see FIG. 57) in the second embodiment, the processes of S401 to S405 are the same as the processes of S401 to S405 of the start winning process (see FIG. 22) in the first embodiment. Is executed.

  In the start winning process 2 (S105) in the second embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S401 that a ball has entered the first entrance 64 (S401: Yes), the first per-random number register R1 The values of the first hit type register R2 and the stop type selection register R3 are acquired from the special-purpose random number generation IC 900, stored in the special-purpose counter temporary storage area 203j (S431), and the process proceeds to S402. .

  Further, in the start winning process 2 (see FIG. 57), when the process of S405 is completed, each value of the special symbol counter temporary storage area 203j provided in the RAM 203 is stored in an empty area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. (S432), this process ends. By this start winning process 2 (see FIG. 57), various random number values (various register values) generated by the special figure random number generation IC 900 can be acquired and used for lottery of special symbols. By using a randomly generated random number for the lottery, the lottery result can be made more random.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 58, the through-gate passage process 2 (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing through-gate passage processing 2 (S107) in the second embodiment. This through-gate passing process 2 (S107) is similar to the through-gate passing process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 24), and it is determined whether or not a sphere has passed through the through gate 67. This is a process for acquiring and holding a random value used in the lottery for a normal symbol.

  Of the through gate passing process 2 (S107), in each process of S601 to S604, the same processes as the respective processes of S601 to S604 of the through gate passing process (see FIG. 24) in the first embodiment are executed. . Further, in the through gate passing process 2 (S107) in the present embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S601 that the sphere has passed through the through gate 67 (S601: Yes), the value of the second per random number register R4 is set. It is acquired from the random number generating IC 901 for the normal map, stored in the temporary counter storage area 203k for the normal map (S631), and the process proceeds to S602.

  In the through gate passing process 2 (S107) in the present embodiment, when the process of S604 ends, the value of the temporary counter temporary storage area 203k provided in the RAM 203 is set in an empty area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b. Store (S632) and end the process. Through this through-gate passing process 2 (see FIG. 58), various random number values (various register values) generated by the general-purpose random number generation IC 901 can be acquired and used for normal symbol lottery. By using a randomly generated random number for the lottery, the lottery result can be made more random.

  Next, the main reselection process (S131) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. This main reselection process (S131) is one of the timer interrupt processes 2 (see FIG. 54) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, and is a special symbol variation start process 2 (see FIG. 56). In the process for determining the fluctuation pattern, when “re-selection” is determined four or more times in succession, the process for selecting the fluctuation pattern based on the determination of “re-selection” after the fourth time. is there.

  In this main reselection process (S131), it is first determined whether or not the main reselection flag 203i is on (S4101). If the main reselection flag 203i is off (S4101: No), this process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process 2. If the main reselection flag 203i is on (S4101: Yes), next, the value of the variation type register RS1 is acquired from the special-purpose random number generation IC 900 (S4102), the jackpot lottery result and the value of the variation type register RS1 Based on the above, a variation pattern is determined (S4103). Then, it is determined whether the determined variation pattern is “reselection” (S4104). If the determined variation pattern is re-selected (S4104: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is. Thus, when “reselection” is determined from the variation pattern table 202d, the next timer interrupt processing 2 (see FIG. 54) is completed by ending the processing while keeping the main reselection flag 203i on. In the main reselecting process (S131) executed in step S), the process of reselecting the variation pattern can be performed again.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4104 that the determined variation pattern is not a reselection (S4104: No), a variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern determined in step S4103 (S4105). Based on the displayed display mode, a stop type command is set (S4106). Next, the main reselection flag 203i is set to OFF (S4107), and this process ends.

  Next, the main process 2 executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the main process 2 in the second embodiment. The main process 2 (see FIG. 60) in the second embodiment is for executing the main control of the game by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, similarly to the main process (see FIG. 27) in the first embodiment. It is processing.

  Of the main process 2 (see FIG. 60) in the second embodiment, the processes of S901, S903 to S909, and S912 to S915 are the processes of S901, S903 to S909, and S912 to S915 of the first embodiment, respectively. The same process as the process is executed. In the main process 2 (see FIG. 60) in the second embodiment, the processes of S902, S910, and S911 of the main process (see FIG. 27) in the first embodiment are abolished (deleted). In this embodiment, the random number value (register value) generated by the special-purpose random number generation IC 900 is used for various lotteries, and it is not necessary to generate random numbers in software. Each processing of S910 and S911 is abolished. Except for the point that these processes are abolished, the process is the same as the main process (see FIG. 27) in the first embodiment. Thus, in the main process 2 (see FIG. 60) in the second embodiment, random numbers are generated in software by using the random number generation ICs (the special-purpose random number generation IC 900 and the universal random number generation IC 901). The processing (S902, S910, and S911) for this can be made unnecessary, and the processing load can be reduced.

<Regarding Control Process of Audio Lamp Control Device in Second Embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 63. First, with reference to FIG. 61, the main process 2 (refer FIG. 61) of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus 113 in this embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the main process 2 in the second embodiment. Of the main processing 2 (see FIG. 61), the same processing as the main processing (see FIG. 30) in the first embodiment is executed in each processing of S1201 to S1210 and S1213 to S1218.

  Moreover, in the main process 2 (refer FIG. 61) in 2nd Embodiment, after performing the process of S1201-S1210, the weight progress effect process mentioned later is performed (S1231). Although the details will be described later, in this weight progress effect process (S1231), a predetermined period (1050 milliseconds) has elapsed without starting the next variation after the previous variation pattern (variation display) has ended. In this case, it is a process for setting a specific effect (weight progress effect).

  After execution of the weight progress effect (S1231), the command determination process 2 (S1212) is executed instead of the command determination process (see FIG. 31) in the first embodiment, and the processes after S1213 are executed. Details of the command determination process 2 (S1212) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 2 (S1212) in the second embodiment. In the command determination process 2 (S1212) in the second embodiment, the command received from the main controller 110 is determined in the same manner as the command determination process (see FIG. 31) in the first embodiment, and the command type is determined according to the command type. This is a process for executing control.

  Of the command determination process 2 (S1212) in the second embodiment, the processes of S1301 to S1308 and S1316 are respectively the processes of S1301 to S1308 and S1316 of the command determination process (see FIG. 31) in the first embodiment. The same process as the process is executed.

  In the command determination process 2 (see FIG. 62) in the second embodiment, when the process of S1303 ends, the value of the weight measurement counter 223g is initialized to 0 (S1331), and the weight measurement flag 223h is set off. (S1332), this process ends.

  Further, in the command determination process 2 in the present embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S1307 that the pending ball number command has not been received (S1307: No), it is then determined whether a stop command has been received (S1333). ). If a stop command has been received (S1333: Yes), it is then determined whether there is a holding ball based on the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c (S1334), and there is a holding ball (that is, the special symbol holding) When it is determined that the value of the ball counter 203c is 1 or more (S1334: Yes), the weight measurement flag 223h is set to off (S1335), and this process ends. Also, in the process of S1334, when it is determined that there is no holding ball (S1334: No), this process is ended as it is.

  By setting the weight measurement flag 223h to ON for the holding ball, the state in which the previous fluctuation is completed and the fluctuation pattern command is not received even though the holding ball exists is counted (timed). be able to. In the present embodiment, when this state continues for 1050 milliseconds, a specific effect (weight progress effect) is executed. As a result, the display content of the third symbol display device 81 can be varied even when the variation pattern command is not received, so that the pachinko machine 10 operates normally even if the next variation effect is not started. The player can be made aware that

  If it is determined that the stop command has not been received in the process of S1333 (S1333: No), the process of S1316 is executed, and then the command determination process 2 is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 63, the weight progress effect process (S1231) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing this weight progress effect process (S1231). This weight progress effect process (S1231) is a process for setting a specific effect (weight progress effect) as described above.

  In this weight progress effect process (S1231), first, it is determined whether or not the weight measurement flag 223h is on (S4201). If it is determined in the process of S4201 that the weight measurement flag 223h is off (S4201: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4201 that the weight measurement flag 223h is on (S4201: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the weight measurement counter 223g (S4202), and then the value of the weight measurement counter 223g is 3000. It is determined whether it is larger (S4203). In the process of S4202, when it is determined that the value of the weight measurement counter 223g is larger than 3000 (S4203: Yes), it means that 3 seconds or more have elapsed since the last fluctuation pattern (fluctuation display) was completed. To do. That is, since it means that the variation pattern command has not been received even though a sufficient time has elapsed to receive the variation pattern command from the main controller 110, some abnormality (for example, the main controller There is a high possibility that a fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110 has not been normally received) due to a failure of 110 or a malfunction such as a harness (disconnection, etc.). Therefore, in this case, a display error command for setting a display for notifying the player or the hall of the occurrence of an error is set (S4204), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4203 that the value of the weight measurement counter 223g is 3000 or less (S4203: No), it is then determined whether the value of the weight measurement counter 223g is greater than 1050 (S4205). If it is determined that the value of the weight measurement counter 223g is greater than 1050 (S4205: Yes), the fluctuation pattern command is passed even though 50 milliseconds have elapsed since the symbol stop period of 1 second has elapsed. Means not receiving. That is, when the main controller 110 selects the variation pattern (variation time), it is highly likely that “reselection” is continuously determined and the determination of the variation pattern (variation time) is delayed. Therefore, in this case, a display weight progress effect command for setting display of a specific effect (weight progress effect) is set (S4206), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S4205, when it is determined that the value of the weight measurement counter 223g is smaller than 1050 (S4205: No), this process is terminated as it is.

  The display weight progress effect command set in the process of S4206 is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and the command output process (S1202) of the main process 2 (see FIG. 61) executed by the MPU 221. Are transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display notice command, the display control device 114 displays a specific effect (weight progress effect) on the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, as a weight progress effect, even if a variation pattern command is notified immediately after the effect is started, the effect has little influence on the variation time notified by the variation pattern command (an effect that can be ended immediately). Is executed. More specifically, for example, until the change pattern command is notified, an effect in which one or more stop symbols shine is executed. By executing a simple effect without a story (such as an effect where the design shines), even if the change pattern command is received during the effect and the change is started, the player can hardly feel uncomfortable. Moreover, it can be recognized as if it was a sign of the start of fluctuation.

  In the present embodiment, the weight progress effect is executed when the variation pattern command is not notified for a predetermined period (1050 milliseconds) or more after the previous variation display is completed, even though the number of held balls is one or more. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the weight elapsed effect is not executed even when the variation pattern command is not notified for a predetermined period (1050 milliseconds) after the previous variation display is completed. Also good. More specifically, if it is known in advance that the next fluctuation is a big hit, such as by prefetching the jackpot determination result, the weight lapse effect may not be executed. As a result, the player feels uncomfortable once that the variable display is not started even though the number of held balls is 1 or more. It can be impressed that the delay was a sign of a big hit. As a result, the interest of the player can be improved.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, the predetermined ratio (6/256) in the predetermined determination (determination for determining the variation pattern) of the main control device 110 that executes main control relating to the game. ) Is selected so that “reselect” is selected. In addition, the number of determination values corresponding to reselection is set so that the number of determination values from which determination results are derived without being reselected becomes a clear number (250). That is, when the probability that each determination result (variation pattern type) is determined in a predetermined determination is expressed as a percentage, it is set to be an integer percentage (zero after the decimal point). As a result, when the probability of each determination result is expressed as a percentage, it becomes a value that is easier to understand, so that it is possible to provide a gaming machine that makes it easier to understand specifications and the like.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a fluctuating effect is started based on the winning of a game ball at the starting port. This winning effect is started immediately after winning (for example, within 1 second) if the winning is not put on hold, and if the winning is put on hold, immediately after the end of the changing effect based on the winning immediately before the holding is finished. It is usually started (for example, within 1 second).

  However, if the variation effect is not started immediately after the end of the variation effect based on the winning immediately after the winning or on hold, the game is not started in spite of the normal timing when the game is started. There is a risk of distrust to the player.

  For example, in the present embodiment, reselection is selected at a predetermined rate (6/256) in the process of determining the variation pattern of the main controller 110. For this reason, when “reselection” is continuously determined, the variation pattern is not determined during that time, so the period from the end of one variation display to the start of the next variation display is long. As a result, the above-described problems occur.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the fluctuation pattern command for a predetermined period (1050 milliseconds) or more after the previous fluctuation display is completed even though the number of held balls is one or more. If not, a specific effect (weight progress effect) is executed. As a result, the display content of the third symbol display device 81 can be varied even when the variation pattern command is not received, so that the pachinko machine 10 operates normally even if the next variation effect is not started. The player can be made aware that In addition, as a weight progress effect, even if a variation pattern command is notified immediately after the effect is started, the effect has little influence on the variation time notified by the variation pattern command (an effect that can be ended immediately). Is executed. More specifically, for example, until the change pattern command is notified, an effect in which one or more stop symbols shine is executed. By executing a simple effect without a story (such as an effect where the design shines), even if the change pattern command is received during the effect and the change is started, the player can hardly feel uncomfortable. Moreover, it can be recognized as if it was a sign of the start of fluctuation.

  In the present embodiment, a specific effect (wait progress effect) is executed when a change pattern command is not notified for a predetermined period (1050 milliseconds) or longer. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Of course, a specific effect (weight progress effect) may be executed when “re-selection” continues for a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) as the lottery result of the variation pattern.

  In the present embodiment, the configuration is such that the weight progress effect (the effect that the symbol shines) is executed when 1050 milliseconds have elapsed since the previous fluctuation stop, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even if the variation pattern command is not received, the variation of the symbol may be started. As a result, since the next change is started after 1050 milliseconds at the latest from the previous symbol stop, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the symbol stop state from continuing for a long time. Therefore, the player can play the game with confidence without feeling uncomfortable.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, random numbers used for drawing (determining) the type of the notice effect are obtained one by one from the effect random number generation IC 800 when the lottery is executed. It was.

  On the other hand, in the third embodiment, a predetermined number (100) of random number values are obtained in advance from the production random number generation IC 800 and stored in the RAM 223, and the announcement effect is produced using the stored random number values. The lottery (decision) is executed. Further, when a random number value is acquired in advance, it is determined whether or not the lottery result is a random value that becomes “re-lottery” (that is, a random number value in the range of “250 to 255”). Only random number values that are not determined (that is, random value values in the range of “0 to 249”) are stored in the RAM 223. That is, the value corresponding to “re-lottery” is configured to be discarded without being stored in the RAM 223. As a result, when the lottery (decision) process of the notice effect is actually executed, the “re-lottery” is not decided, so that the decision of the notice effect is delayed due to the continuous “re-lottery”. This can be prevented (suppressed).

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment is different in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in that the RTC 292 for measuring the current time is provided in the audio lamp control device 113, and the audio lamp control. The configuration of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 provided in the device 113 is partially changed, and the partial processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Is a point. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control apparatus 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 are the first. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the first embodiment, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

<Electrical Configuration in Third Embodiment>
First, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 64 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 64, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the RTC 292 is electrically connected to the input / output port 225 of the audio lamp control device 113. The RTC 292 can measure the current time. The sound lamp control device 113 can acquire the time counted by the RTC 292. Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, when the power is turned on (when a predetermined number (100) of random number values are not stored in the RAM 223), a random number value predetermined for the RAM 223 is produced. The counter initial value table 222c is read and stored. In the effect counter initial value table 222c, a plurality of pattern combinations are defined as initial values of 100 random numbers stored in the RAM 223. In the present embodiment, a random number value of a different combination is set as an initial value according to the current time acquired from the RTC 292. Thus, the random value set as the initial value can be made a more random value while quickly determining the initial value of the random number.

  Next, the ROM 222 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 65A, the ROM 222 of this embodiment is provided with an effect counter initial value table 222c in addition to the configuration of the ROM 222 of the first embodiment. This effect counter initial value table 222c is a data table used to select an initial value of a random value that is referred to when selecting a notice effect. In the effect counter initial value table 222c, a plurality (10 patterns) of combinations of a predetermined number (100) of random values that can be selected as initial values are defined. Further, all the random values defined in the effect counter initial value table 222c are values in the range of “0 to 249”. That is, the random value set as the initial value is a random value outside the range of random values for which “reselection” is determined (that is, “250 to 255”). Thereby, when selecting the type of the notice effect, the type can be selected without selecting “reselection”, so that the processing time for determining (selecting) the notice effect can be shortened.

  When power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, the effect counter initial value table 222c is referred to and an initial value is selected. The selected initial value is stored in an effect counter storage area 223i described later.

  Details of the effect counter initial value table 222c will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 66 is a diagram showing an example of the specified contents of the effect counter initial value table 222c. As shown in FIG. 66, in the effect counter initial value table 222c, 10 combinations (array Nos. 1 to 100) of 100 random number values are defined (table Nos. 1 to 10). In this embodiment, in the start-up process 3 (see FIG. 67) executed based on power-on, No. One of the tables 1 to 10 is selected and stored in the effect counter storage area 223i.

  In addition, No. In obtaining one of the tables 1 to 10, a table corresponding to the current time counted by the RTC 292 is selected. More specifically, if the last digit of the power-on time is 1, the No. No. 1 is acquired, and if the last digit 2 is No. 2 tables are obtained. Likewise, if the last digit is 3, 3 table, if the last digit is 4, no. If the last digit is 0, no. Ten tables are selected. As a result, a combination of random numbers different every time can be set as an initial value according to the timing when the power is turned on, so that the type can be determined more randomly when the notice effect is determined (selected).

  The number of tables and the number of arrays of each table are not limited to those described above. For example, the number of tables may be 15 patterns or 5 patterns. The number of arrays may be 150 or 50.

  Further, the method for selecting a table according to the current time is not limited to the above. For example, the table may be selected according to the last digit of the power-on time in milliseconds. Thereby, even when power is simultaneously supplied to a plurality of gaming machines, the tables selected by the respective gaming machines can be made different (a random value is set in each gaming machine).

  In the present embodiment, the table is selected in accordance with the current time measured by the RTC 292. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the selection may be made according to the measurement results (temperature, humidity, light quantity, volume, etc.) of other measurement means, or the measurement results may be selected in combination. Further, the selection may be made based on the random number value generated by the hardware random number generation IC, or the random number value may be generated by software processing and selected based on the random value.

  Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 65B, the RAM 223 in the present embodiment is provided with an effect counter storage area 223i, an acquisition pointer 223j, and a reacquisition flag 223k in addition to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first embodiment. Yes.

  The effect counter storage area 223i is a storage area for storing an effect counter value (effect random number) used when determining (selecting) the notice effect from the notice effect selection table 222b. It consists of 100 storage areas associated with the values to be obtained. Each storage area stores one random value (effect random number) used to determine the type of the notice effect. As for the random number value stored in the effect counter storage area 223i, a new random value is acquired from the effect random number generation IC 800 every time one random value is used for selection of the notice effect. The acquired random number value is overwritten on the storage area in which the random value used for selecting the notice effect is stored (see S4305 in FIG. 69). Thereby, it is possible to maintain a state where 100 random number values generated at different timings are stored in the effect counter storage area 223i.

  The acquisition pointer 223j is a pointer indicating which one of 100 random number values stored in the effect counter storage area 223i is to be selected. When the type of the notice effect is selected, the value of the acquisition pointer 223j is referred to, the effect random number is selected from the storage area corresponding to the value of the acquisition pointer 223j, and the determination value defined in the notice effect selection table 222b The type of the notice effect is determined based on the (random value). The value of the acquisition pointer 223j is updated by one each time one random value is acquired from the effect counter storage area 223i in order to determine the type of the notice effect. Thereby, the random number for production can be set to a more random value.

  The reacquisition flag 223k is a flag indicating whether or not the effect random number value acquired from the effect random number generation IC 800 is a value corresponding to “reselection” (that is, a range of “250 to 255”). If this reacquisition flag 223k is on, it means that the acquired effect random number value is a value corresponding to “reselection”, and it is necessary to acquire the effect random number value again from the effect random number generation IC 800. To do. On the other hand, if it is OFF, it means that there is no need to re-acquire the effect random number. The reacquisition flag 223k is set to ON when it is determined that the effect random number acquired from the effect random number generation IC 800 is a value corresponding to “reselection” (S4304 in FIG. 69). Further, when a value in the range of “0 to 249” is acquired by re-acquisition of the effect random number (see S4405 in FIG. 70).

<Regarding Control Processing of Sound Lamp Control Device in Third Embodiment>
Next, a control process executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, with reference to FIG. 67, the start-up process 3 in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment is demonstrated.

  Among the startup processes 3 in the third embodiment, in the processes of S1101 to S1111, the same processes as the processes of S1101 to S1111 of the startup process (see FIG. 26) of the first embodiment are executed. Further, in the start-up process 3 (see FIG. 67) in the third embodiment, when the process of S1110 ends, next, time information corresponding to the current time is acquired from the RTC 292 (S1131), and based on the acquired time information. Then, a combination of initial values for the effect random value 100 stored in the effect counter storage area 223i is selected from the effect counter initial value table 222c and stored (set initial values) in the effect counter initial value table 222c (S1132). ). When the process of S1132 ends, the process proceeds to S1111.

  In this startup process 3, by selecting a combination of initial values preliminarily defined in the ROM 222 and setting the combination in the effect counter storage area 223i, one initial value of effect random numbers is generated from the effect random number generation IC 800. Compared to the case of acquiring one, the initial value of the production random number can be quickly determined. Therefore, it is possible to shift to a state where the game by the player can be executed earlier.

  Next, the main process 3 (see FIG. 68) in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Of the main processing 3 (see FIG. 68) in the third embodiment, in S1201 to S1210 and S1212 to S1218, S1201 to S1210 and S1212 of the main processing (see FIG. 30) in the first embodiment, respectively. The same processing as that in steps S1218 is executed.

  Also, in the main process 3 (see FIG. 68) in the present embodiment, when the process of S1210 is completed, the effect random number value stored in the previous effect counter storage area 223i is updated, which corresponds to “reselection”. If the effect random number value is acquired, the effect random number value is acquired again, and the reacquisition process for updating the effect counter storage area 223i is performed (S1261), and the process proceeds to S1212 and subsequent steps. Details of the reacquisition process (S1261) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 69, the notice effect selection process 3 (S1406) in the second embodiment will be described. This notice effect selection process 3 (S1406) is a process executed in the variable display setting process (see FIG. 32) instead of the notice effect selection process (see FIG. 33) in the first embodiment. Similar to the notice effect selection process in the embodiment (see FIG. 33), this is a process for selecting the notice effect type from the effect random number generated by the effect random number generation IC 800 and notifying the display control device 114 of the type.

  In the notice effect selection process 3 (S1406), first, among the 100 effect random values stored in the effect counter storage area 223i, the effect disturbance stored in the storage area (address) indicated by the value of the acquisition pointer 223j. A numerical value is acquired (S4301). Next, the register value of the effect random number generation IC 800 is acquired as a new effect random value (S4302), and the acquired register value is a value corresponding to “reselection” (that is, within the range of “250 to 255”). It is determined whether or not there is (S4303).

  In the process of S4303, when it is determined that the acquired register value (effect random number value) is a value corresponding to “reselection” (that is, within the range of “250 to 255”) (S4303: Yes), By setting the acquisition flag 223k to ON, the re-acquisition of the effect random number is set (S4304), and the process proceeds to S4306. On the other hand, in the process of S4303, when it is determined that the register value acquired from the random number generation IC 800 for production is out of the range of “reselection” (that is, within the range of “0 to 249”) (S4303: No). The acquired register value is stored as a new effect random number value in the storage area (address) corresponding to the value of the acquisition pointer 223j in the effect counter storage area 223i (S4305), and the process proceeds to S4306. To do.

  In the process of S4306, the acquisition pointer 223j is updated by adding 1 (S4306), and it is determined whether or not the value of the updated acquisition pointer 223j is larger than 100 (S4307). In the process of S4307, if it is determined that the value of the updated acquisition pointer 223j is greater than 100 (S4307: Yes), the acquisition pointer 223j is initialized to 0 (S4308), and the process proceeds to S4309. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4307 that the value of the updated acquisition pointer 223j is 100 or less (S4307: No), the process of S4308 is skipped and the process proceeds to S4309.

  In the processing of S4309, it is determined whether or not the fluctuating effect for setting the notice effect is a fluctuating effect for notifying the jackpot (whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot) (S4309). If it is determined that there is (S4309: Yes), the announcement effect selection table 222b1 (see FIG. 11B) for jackpot announcement and the effect random number (effect counter) acquired in the process of S4301 are used. A type is selected (S4310), and the process proceeds to S4312.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4309 that the game is not a big hit (S4309: No), the release notice effect selection table 222b2 (see FIG. 11C) and the random number value for the effect obtained in the process of S4301 ( The notice effect is selected based on the effect counter) (S4311), and the process proceeds to S4312. In the process of S4312, a notice effect command is set based on the selection result of the notice effect (S4312), and this process ends.

  Next, the reacquisition process (S1261) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. This re-acquisition process (S1261) is performed when an effect random number value corresponding to “reselect” is acquired when the effect random number value stored in the effect effect counter storage area 223i is updated as described above. This is a process for acquiring the effect random number again and updating the effect counter storage area 223i.

  In this re-acquisition process (S1261), it is first determined whether or not the re-acquisition flag is 223k on (S4401). Exit. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4401 that the reacquisition flag 223k is on (S4401: Yes), a register value (effect random number value) is acquired from the effect random number generation IC 800 (S4402). Next, it is determined whether or not the register value acquired in the process of S4402 is a value corresponding to “reselection” (ie, “250 to 255”) (S4403), and a value corresponding to “reselection”. If so (S4403: Yes), this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4403, when it is determined that the acquired register value is outside the range of “reselection” (that is, “0 to 249”) (S4403: No), the value of the acquisition pointer 223j is read out. The register value (effect random number value) acquired in the process of S4402 is stored in the storage area (address) of the effect counter storage area 223i corresponding to the value obtained by subtracting 1 from the read value (S4404). Next, the reacquisition flag 223k is set to OFF (S4405), and this process is terminated.

  By this re-acquisition process (S1261), only the effect random number value out of the range of “re-selection” from the effect random number generation IC 800 can be stored in the effect counter storage area 223i. It is possible to prevent (suppress) the production random number value read from the counter storage area 223i from becoming a value corresponding to “reselection”. Therefore, any type of the notice effect (notice effects A to C) can be selected (determined) without fail by the process of selecting the notice effect once, so that the processing time can be shortened.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, a predetermined number (100) of effect random numbers are stored in advance in the effect counter storage area 223i provided in the RAM 223, and stored in advance. A lottery (decision) of the notice effect is executed using the rendered random number for the effect. By storing a plurality (100) of random number values in advance, it is possible to prevent (suppress) a situation in which no random number value is stored in the effect counter storage area 223i. Can normally be determined (determined). Further, every time the stored random number value is used to determine the notice effect, the used random number value is discarded, and a new random value is obtained from the effect random number generation IC 800 and overwritten in the effect counter storage area 223i. It is configured. By sequentially overwriting (updating) the contents, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the same random number value from being repeatedly used for the determination, and therefore it is possible to ensure the randomness of the random number value for production.

  Further, the effect counter storage area 223i is controlled so as to store only values outside the range of random values for which “reselect” is determined (that is, random values in the range of “0 to 249”). . With this configuration, if one random number value is acquired from a predetermined number of random number values stored in the effect counter storage area 223i, the type of the notice effect is determined only by executing a single notice effect determination. Can be determined (that is, any of the notice effects A to C can be determined without determining "reselection"). Therefore, since the time required for the process for determining the type of the notice effect can be shortened, the kind of the notice effect can be surely notified to the display control device 114 by the start timing of the notice effect.

  In the present embodiment, the initial value of the effect random value stored in the effect counter storage area 223i when the power is turned on is defined in the effect counter initial value table 222c of the ROM 222, and the startup process 3 (see FIG. 67). The combination of any initial values defined in the effect counter initial value table 222c is transferred to the effect counter storage area 223i. In addition, all the random numbers for effects specified in the effect counter initial value table 222c are values within the range of any determination result (any of the notice effects A to C is determined) ("0 to 249"). Value within the range). By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the time required to store the initial value in the effect counter storage area 223i as compared with the case where the initial value is acquired one by one from the effect random number generation IC 800. When the initial value is obtained one by one from the effect random number generation IC 800, each time a random value is obtained, it is determined whether or not the value corresponds to “reselection”. This is because a new random number value must be acquired again until the random number value falls within the range (in the range of “0 to 249”) that is one of the determination results. By shortening the time for storing the predetermined number (100) of the initial value of the random number for production in the production counter storage area 223i, the period until the game by the pachinko machine 10 becomes possible can be shortened.

  In the present embodiment, 100 random numbers are stored in the effect counter storage area 223i. However, the number is not limited to 100 and can be arbitrarily determined.

  In the present embodiment, the random number value (the so-called hard random number value) generated by the effect random number generation IC 800 is configured to be stored in the effect counter storage area 223i in a predetermined number (100). However, the present invention is not limited to this. Absent. For example, a predetermined number (for example, 100) of random number values (so-called software random number values) generated by software processing may be stored in the effect counter storage area 223i. Software random numbers are generally incremented by one in software processing. Therefore, when the software random number value is acquired again in order to redraw the lottery result, it is highly likely that the random number value is not sufficiently updated. That is, a random value that is a random value cannot be acquired. Therefore, as in the present embodiment, by storing the random number value in the effect counter storage area 223i in advance, it is possible to acquire a random value that is a random value even when the lottery result is re-lotted.

<Fourth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 in the first to third embodiments described above, when a start winning is detected, various information (various counter values) used for lottery of special symbols is acquired, and the ball has passed through the through gate 67. Is detected, the information used for the normal symbol lottery (the value of the second random number counter C4) is acquired. That is, different acquisition operations are executed depending on whether a start winning is detected or the passage of the through gate 67 is detected.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, all the random values are acquired in a batch regardless of whether the start winning is detected or the passage of the through gate 67 is detected. The random number value necessary for this is used for lottery (determination). Random value acquisition operation during debugging (operation verification) or the like in the development stage of the pachinko machine 10 by adopting a configuration in which random number values are collectively read regardless of whether it is a start winning prize or passing through the through gate 67 Can be confirmed together.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in terms of the configuration. The point that it is electrically connected to the output port 205, the point that the configuration of the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 is partially changed, and the partial processing that is executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 Is a point changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control apparatus 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 are the first. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the first embodiment, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

<Electrical Configuration in Fourth Embodiment>
First, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 71 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 71, in this embodiment, in addition to the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, a special-purpose random number generation IC 900 and a general-purpose random number generation IC 901 are connected to the input / output port 205 of the main control device 110. And are electrically connected. Since the special-purpose random number generation IC 900 and the general-purpose random number generation IC 901 are the same as the ICs having the same names provided in the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, various counter values in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 72, in this embodiment, the value of each register provided in the special-purpose random number generation IC 900 and the general-purpose random number generation IC 901 (first per random number register R1, first per type register R2, stop Random values used for various lotteries (values of the type selection register R3, the variation type register RS1, and the second per random number register R4) (the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, and the stop type selection in the first embodiment) Counter C3, variation type counter CS1, second per random number counter C4) and stored in the counter temporary storage area 203p. These counter values are acquired from each IC at the same time and stored in the counter temporary storage area 203p.

  When the value of each register is collectively stored in the counter temporary storage area 203p by detecting the start winning, among the stored register values (random value), the first per-random number register R1, the first Each value of the hit type register R2 and the stop type selection register R3 is stored in an empty area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. On the other hand, if the value of each register is collectively stored in the counter temporary storage area 203p due to the detection of the ball entering the through gate 67, the value of the second random number register R4 is the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b. Stored in the empty area.

  Regardless of the trigger for acquiring the register value, all the register values (random numbers) are collectively stored in the counter temporary storage area 203p, which register is used when acquiring the register value. Since it is possible to omit the process of determining whether or not the value (random value) should be acquired by designating the register value, the register value (random number value) can be quickly stored in the counter temporary storage area 203p. Further, in the debugging (operation verification) in the development stage of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to collectively confirm the operation of acquiring the random value (register value).

  Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. As shown in FIG. 73, the RAM 203 in the fourth embodiment is provided with a special figure continuous clear counter 203n in addition to the configuration of the RAM 203 in the first embodiment. Further, a counter temporary storage area 203p is provided in place of the counter buffer 203y provided in the RAM 203 in the first embodiment.

  The special figure continuous clear counter 203n is the number of consecutive times that various register values are collectively acquired based on the passage of the through gate 67 (that is, the special symbol lottery is continuously executed without the special symbol lottery being executed). This is a counter for counting the number of times. As described above, in the present embodiment, the counter value (register value) used for the lottery of the special symbol or the lottery of the normal symbol is configured to be acquired all at once regardless of the acquisition opportunity. For this reason, the passage of the through gate 67 where the acquisition condition of the counter value (register value) is relatively easily established is intentionally generated, and the first random number (register value) used for the jackpot lottery is obtained. There is a possibility that a fraud in which the value of the random number register R1 is externally analyzed is performed. When this fraudulent act is executed, there is a risk that the jackpot will be illegally assigned because the analysis is performed up to the timing when the register value corresponding to the jackpot is reached due to the tendency of the register value update in the special-purpose random number generation IC 900. . In order to prevent this fraud, in this embodiment, the special figure continuous clear counter 203n counts the number of times the ball has passed through the through gate 67 continuously, and if the count value exceeds a predetermined number, It is configured to determine that there is a possibility of action and set an error display. Thereby, the timing at which the random value corresponding to the jackpot is acquired can be analyzed, and an illegal act of winning the jackpot can be prevented (suppressed).

  The special figure continuous clear counter 203n has an initial value set to 0. Among the counter values (register values) stored in the counter temporary storage area 203p in the through gate passing process 4 (see FIG. 75), Each time the value of the second random number register R4 is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b, the value is incremented by 1 (see S664 in FIG. 75). On the other hand, in the start winning process 4 (see FIG. 74), each time the various counter values (register values) used for the special symbol lottery are stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, they are initialized to 0 (FIG. 74). (See S463).

  As described above, the temporary counter storage area 203p is a storage area for temporarily storing register values (random number values) acquired from the special-purpose random number generation IC 900 and the general-purpose random number generation IC 901. Various register values (random number values) stored in the counter temporary storage area 203p are stored in a corresponding storage area (one of the special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a and the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203b) according to the trigger for acquiring the value. ).

<Regarding Control Processing of Main Controller in Fourth Embodiment>
Next, control processing of the main controller 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 and 75. FIG. First, the start winning process 4 (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing the start winning process 4 in the fourth embodiment. This start winning process 4 (S105) is a process executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 19) instead of the start winning process (see FIG. 22) in the first embodiment.

  Of the start winning process 4 (see FIG. 74) in the fourth embodiment, the processes of S401 to S405 are the same as the processes of S401 to S405 of the start winning process (see FIG. 22) in the first embodiment, respectively. Processing is executed. Further, in the start winning process 4 (see FIG. 74) in the present embodiment, after executing the process of S401, the values of the first hit type register R2, the stop type selection register R3, and the second hit random number register R4 are specially shown. The random number generation IC 900 for use and the random number generation IC 901 for normal use are respectively acquired and stored in the temporary counter storage area 203p provided in the RAM 203 (S461).

  Further, in the start winning process 4 (see FIG. 74) in the present embodiment, when the process of S405 ends, the first per-random number register R1 and the first per-type register R2 stored in the counter temporary storage area 203p in the process of S461. Then, each value of the stop type selection register R3 is transferred to an empty area of the special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a (S462). Next, after initializing the value of the special figure continuous clear counter 203n to 0 (S463), the counter temporary storage area 203p is cleared (S464), and this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 75, the through gate passing process 4 (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing through-gate passage processing 4 in the fourth embodiment. The through gate passing process 4 (see FIG. 75) is a process executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19) instead of the through gate passing process (see FIG. 24) in the first embodiment.

  Of the through gate passage processing 4 (S107), in each processing of S601 to S604, the same processing as the respective processing of S601 to S604 of the through gate passage processing (see FIG. 24) in the first embodiment is executed. Further, in the through gate passing process 4 (see FIG. 75) in the present embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S601 that the sphere has passed through the through gate 67 (S601: Yes), then, the first per random number register R1 , Each value of the first hit type register R2, the stop type selection register R3, and the second hit random number register R4 is obtained from the special figure random number generation IC 900 and the common figure random number generation IC 901, respectively, and stored in the counter temporary storage area 203p. (S661).

  Further, in the through-gate passing process 4 (see FIG. 75) in the present embodiment, when the process of S604 ends, the second per-random number register R4 among the various register values stored in the counter temporary storage area 203p in the process of S661. Is stored in the first area of the free reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 (S662). Then, each register value stored in the temporary counter storage area 203p is cleared (S663), and 1 is added to the value of the special figure continuous clear counter 203n (S664).

  Next, it is determined whether the value of the special figure continuous clear counter 203n is 10 or more (S665). If the value of the special figure continuous clear counter 203n is not 10 or more (S665: No), this processing is terminated as it is. If the value of the special figure continuous clear counter 203n is 10 or more (S665: Yes), an error command is set (S666), and this process is terminated.

  In this way, by configuring so that an error is notified when a lottery of normal symbols is executed ten times or more in succession, out of each register value that is collectively acquired when the through gate 67 passes through The fraudulent act of analyzing the value of the first random number register R1 can be prevented (suppressed). More specifically, as described above, in the present embodiment, the counter value (register value) used for the lottery of the special symbol and the lottery of the normal symbol is configured to be acquired all at once regardless of the acquisition opportunity. . For this reason, the passage of the through gate 67 where the acquisition condition of the counter value (register value) is relatively easily established is intentionally generated, and the first random number (register value) used for the jackpot lottery is obtained. There is a possibility that a fraud in which the value of the random number register R1 is externally analyzed is performed. When this fraudulent act is executed, there is a risk that the jackpot will be illegally assigned because the analysis is performed up to the timing when the register value corresponding to the jackpot is reached due to the tendency of the register value update in the special-purpose random number generation IC 900. . In order to prevent this fraud, in this embodiment, the special figure continuous clear counter 203n counts the number of times the ball has passed through the through gate 67 continuously, and if the count value exceeds a predetermined number, It is configured to determine that there is a possibility of action and set an error display. Thereby, the timing at which the random value corresponding to the jackpot is acquired can be analyzed, and an illegal act of winning the jackpot can be prevented (suppressed).

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, all the register values (random values) are collectively displayed regardless of whether the start winning is detected or the passage of the through gate 67 is detected. Acquired and stored in the temporary counter storage area 203p and transferred to a storage area corresponding to the detected content (either the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b). . Regardless of the trigger for acquiring the register value (random number value), all the register values (random number values) are stored in the counter temporary storage area 203p all at once. Since it is possible to omit the process of determining whether to acquire a value (random number value) by specifying a register, the register value (random number value) can be quickly stored in the counter temporary storage area 203p. Further, the register value (random number) acquisition operation can be collectively confirmed in debugging (operation verification) or the like in the development stage of the pachinko machine 10.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, in the switch reading process (S101 in FIG. 19) executed at a specific trigger of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19), the game ball start winning and passing through the through gate 67 are detected. Detected. When the start winning is detected, the register value of each random number generation IC (the special-purpose random number generation IC 900 and the general-purpose random number generation IC 901) is acquired in the start winning process 4 (see FIG. 74), and the through gate 67 In the through gate passing process 4 (see FIG. 75), the register value of each random number generation IC is acquired. Here, each register value in each random number generation IC is updated with a random value stored at a frequency of 200 μs twice (cycle of 200 kHz). This update interval (time) is determined after each register value (random number value) of each random number generation IC is acquired in the start winning process 4 (see FIG. 74) and then in each through-gate passing process 4 (see FIG. 75). This is shorter than the processing time until the register value (random value) is acquired. Thereby, even if it is a case where the start winning of the game ball and the passage of the through gate 67 are detected in the same timer interruption process (see FIG. 19), the register values (based on the start winnings respectively) The random number) can be made different from the register value (random number) acquired based on the passage through the through gate 67.

  In the present embodiment, the configuration is such that the random number generation IC is used in which the random value stored at a frequency of 200 μs twice (cycle of 200 kHz) is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a random number generation IC that can update the random number value at the timing of acquiring the random value from the main controller 110 may be used. That is, a random number generation IC that can be generated by updating a random value at an arbitrary timing may be used. As a result, the frequency of updating and generating the random number value can be minimized, and the power consumption can be reduced. Of course, the special-purpose random number generation IC 900 and the general-purpose random number generation IC 901 may use random number generation ICs having different update timings. For example, the special-purpose random number generation IC 900 is updated once every 1 μs (1 MHz cycle), and the general-purpose random number generation IC 901 is updated once every 2 μs (500 kHz cycle). It is good.

  In the present embodiment, the random number generation IC 900 and the general-purpose random number generation IC 901 are used as the random number generation IC so that the generated random number values can be collectively obtained. It is not limited to two types. There may be more than three types of random number generation ICs, or one type. For example, one type of random number generation IC is used, that is, the random number generation ICs are combined into one. As a result, in the process of acquiring each random number value from the random number generation IC in a batch, each random number value can be obtained by accessing only one random number generation IC, as compared to acquiring each random number value from a plurality of random number generation ICs. The data can be acquired in a batch, and the processing load can be reduced.

<Modification of Fourth Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 76 and FIG. 77, a pachinko machine 10 according to a modification of the fourth embodiment will be described. In the fourth embodiment described above, the special-purpose random number is obtained when the acquisition condition for the random value (register value) is satisfied in the start winning process 4 (see FIG. 74) and the through gate passing process 4 (see FIG. 75). All random number values (register values) generated by the generation IC 900 and the general-purpose random number generation IC 901 are configured to be acquired collectively.

  In addition to this, in the present modification, when the acquisition condition of the random number value is satisfied, the acquisition of the random value (register value) and the storage of the random value are executed in the same one process (winning process). It is configured as follows. As a result, when the designer performs debugging or the like, it is sufficient to confirm only one process (winning process), so the burden on the designer at the time of development can be reduced. Also, in the switch reading process (S101), when it is determined that there is a ball entering the first ball slot 64 and the through gate 67 has passed, the random number value acquired in one process (winning process) ( Register value) can be used to store random numbers corresponding to each of them, so that the processing load can be reduced.

<Regarding Control Process of Main Controller in Modified Example of Fourth Embodiment>
First, with reference to FIG. 76, the timer interrupt process 5 executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 in the modification of the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing 5 in a modification of the fourth embodiment. In addition, about the same part as the timer interruption process process (refer FIG. 19) in 1st Embodiment, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the description is abbreviate | omitted and only a different part is demonstrated.

  In this timer interrupt process 5, as in the timer interrupt process of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 19), first, the switch reading process of S101 is executed, and then a winning process is executed (SS161). Next, special symbol variation processing is executed (S104), normal symbol variation processing is executed (S106), launch control processing is executed (S108), and other processing that should be periodically executed is executed. (S109), the timer interrupt process 5 is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 77, a winning process (161) which is one of the timer interrupt processes 5 executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 in the modification of the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing a winning process (S161) in a modification of the fourth embodiment.

  This winning process (S161) is executed in the timer interruption process 5 (see FIG. 76), and it is determined whether or not there is a winning (start winning) at the first ball slot 64 or passing through the through gate 67. When winning or passing is received, various random number values are obtained from the random number generation ICs (the special-purpose random number generation IC 900 and the general-purpose random number generation IC 901) in a lump, and the first input is made using the various random number values. This is a process for executing a process corresponding to winning (start winning) at the ball opening 64 and passing through the through gate 67. By this winning process (S161), in the same timer interruption process (see FIG. 76), when the starting winning of the game ball and the passing of the through gate 67 are detected, the starting winning and the passing of the through gate 67 are detected. As a result, the processing load can be reduced as compared with the case where each register value (random number value) is acquired from each random number generation IC.

  When the winning process is executed, it is first determined whether or not the ball has won the first entrance 64 or passed through the through gate 67 (S4501). Here, the entrance to the first entrance 64 is detected over three timer interruption processes. If it is determined that the ball has not won the first entrance 64 or passed through the through gate 67 (S4501: No), this process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process 5.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the ball has won the first entrance 64 or passed through the through gate 67 (S4501: Yes), the first per-random number register R1, the first per-type register R2, and the stop type selection register R3 Then, each value of the second random number register R4 is acquired from the special-purpose random number generation IC 900 and the general-purpose random number generation IC 901 and stored in the counter temporary storage area 203p provided in the RAM 203 (S4502). Next, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first entrance (S4503). If the ball has not won the first entrance (S4503: No), the processing of S4504 to S4508 is not executed and the processing proceeds to S4509. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ball has won the first winning opening (S4503: Yes), the value of the special symbol reservation ball number counter 203c (the number N of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is acquired (S4504). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S4505).

  If the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is not less than 4 (S4505: No), the process proceeds to S4509. On the other hand, if there is a winning at the first entrance 64 (S4503: Yes) and the value (N) of the special symbol reservation ball number counter 203c is less than 4 (S4505: Yes), the number of special symbol reservation balls The value (N) of the counter 203c is incremented by 1 (S4506). Then, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c changed by the calculation is set (S4507), and the first random number register R1 stored in the counter temporary storage area 203p in the processing of S4501 Each value of the type register R2 per stop and the value of the stop type register R3 are stored in the first area among the free reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a (S4508), Transition to processing. In the process of S4508, the value of the special symbol reservation ball counter 203c is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reservation first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  In the processing of S4509, it is determined whether or not the sphere has passed through the through gate 67 (S4509). Here, the passage of the sphere in the through gate 67 is detected over three timer interruption processes. If it is determined that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (S4509: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired (S4510). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S4511).

  Whether the ball has not passed through the through gate 67 (S4509: No), or even if the ball has passed through the through gate 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol reservation ball number counter 203d is not less than 4 (S4511). : No), the process proceeds to S4514. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the through gate 67 (S4509: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reservation ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S4511: Yes), the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203d The value (M) is incremented by 1 (S4512). Then, in the processing of S4502, the value of the second per-random number register R4 stored in the temporary counter storage area 203p is used as an empty reservation area (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. Are stored in the first area (S4513), and the process proceeds to S4514. In the process of S4513, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203d is referred to. If the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  In the process of S4514, the value of the counter temporary storage area 203p is cleared (S4514), and then this process ends.

  As described above, in the modification of the fourth embodiment, when a random value acquisition condition is satisfied, the acquisition of a random value (register value) in the same one process (winning process) and the random value Configured to perform storage. As a result, when the designer performs debugging or the like, it is sufficient to confirm only one process (winning process), so the burden on the designer at the time of development can be reduced. Also, in the switch reading process (S101), when it is determined that there is a ball entering the first ball slot 64 and the through gate 67 has passed, the random number value acquired in one process (winning process) ( Register value) can be used to store random numbers corresponding to each of them, so that the processing load can be reduced.

<Fifth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 78 to 84. In the first embodiment described above, when selecting a notice effect from the notice effect selection table 222b, “reselect” is selected at a predetermined ratio (6/256).

  In contrast, the fifth embodiment is configured such that “reselection” can be determined when determining the variation pattern mode from the variation pattern selection table 222a. More specifically, when the variation pattern (variation time) notified from the main control device 110 is super reach (60 seconds), “reselection” is determined at a predetermined rate. In addition, in the present embodiment, the ratio at which “reselection” is determined varies depending on whether the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot or not. And when determining the production | generation aspect of a super reach, it is comprised so that the production | generation of a different aspect may be performed according to the frequency | count that "re-selection" was determined continuously. Thereby, since it can be predicted whether it is a big hit or a loss according to the production mode at the time of super reach, the player can be noticed by the production. Therefore, the player's willingness to participate can be improved.

  The pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment is structurally different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in that the configuration of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 is partially changed. The point and the partial process executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 are changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control apparatus 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 are the first. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the first embodiment, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 78A, the configuration of the ROM 222 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 78 (a), the ROM 222 of the present embodiment is provided with a pseudo-variation supplementary effect selection table 222d in addition to the configuration of the ROM 222 of the first embodiment. This pseudo variation supplementary effect selection table 222d is a data table that defines the mode of pseudo variation display to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when a super reach with a variation time of 60 seconds is notified by the variation pattern command. It is. Further, the notice effect selection table 222b provided in the ROM 222 in the first embodiment is abolished.

  Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 78 (b). As shown in FIG. 78 (b), in the RAM 223 of this embodiment, a fluctuation reselection flag 223m and a fluctuation reselection counter 223n are added to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first embodiment, and a notice reselection flag is displayed. 223e and the notice reselection counter 223f are deleted.

  The fluctuation reselection flag 223m is a flag indicating whether or not “reselection” is determined from the super reach selection table 222a3. If the change reselection flag 223m is on, it means that “reselection” is determined from the super reach selection table 222a3 (the type (mode) of super reach is not determined), and if it is off, This means that “reselection” has not been determined (the type (mode) of super reach has been determined). The initial value of the fluctuation reselection flag 223m is set to OFF, and “reselection” is determined from the super reach production selection table 222a3 in the fluctuation pattern selection process (see FIG. 83) for selecting the type of super reach. If it has been set, it is set to ON (see S5007 in FIG. 83). Then, in the change reselection process (see FIG. 84), when any of the super reach types (super reach types A to C) is determined, it is set to off (see S5110 in FIG. 84). When “reselection” is determined from the super reach production selection table 222a3 by referring to the change reselection flag 223m, reselection (re-selection) of the super reach type is executed in the change reselection process (see FIG. 84). (Lottery) can be executed.

  The variation reselection counter 223n is a counter for counting the number of times that the variation effect type is selected again (re-lottery). That is, it is a counter for counting the number of times “reselection” is determined from the super reach selection table 222a3 between the time when the variation pattern command is received and the time when the variation pattern type is determined. As described above, in the present embodiment, a variation pattern having a different aspect is set according to the number of times “reselection” is determined. The number of times “reselection” is determined is determined by the value of the variable reselection counter 223n (see S5106 in FIG. 84). The variation reselection counter 223n is incremented by one each time the variation reselection process is executed (see S5103 in FIG. 84). On the other hand, when any variation pattern mode is selected in the variation reselection processing, it is initialized to 0 (see S5109 in FIG. 84).

  Next, the variation pattern selection table 222a in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 79 (a) to 79 (d). First, FIG. 79A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection table 222a in the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 79 (a), the variation pattern selection table 222a in the present embodiment displays the variation pattern display mode when the variation pattern command notified from the main controller 110 is a command indicating complete deviation. When the normal reach is notified by the normal variation pattern selection table 222a1 for selection and the variation pattern command, the normal reach selection table 222a2 for selecting the display mode of the variation pattern and the super reach is notified by the variation pattern command The super reach selection table 222a3 for selecting the display mode of the fluctuation pattern, and the special reach selection table 222a4 for selecting the display mode of the fluctuation pattern when the special reach is notified by the fluctuation pattern command. It is configured.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 79B to 79D, details of the super reach selection table 222a3 among the data tables constituting the variation pattern selection table 222a will be described. As shown in FIG. 79 (b), as the super reach selection table 222a3, it is referred to when the big hit super reach selection table 222a3a that is referred to when the winning super reach is notified and when the missed super reach is notified. It consists of a detachable super reach selection table 222a3b. Each table defines a variation pattern type (super reach types A to C) in association with the value of the random number for production.

  As shown in FIG. 79 (c), in the jackpot super reach selection table 222a3a, the production random number value is associated with the range of “0-60” and the super reach type A is associated with the range of “61-120”. Is associated with the super reach type B, and the range of “121 to 180” is associated with the super reach type C. The remaining “181 to 255” ranges are associated with “reselection”. If any one of the super reach types is assigned to the entire range of the production random numbers “0 to 255”, the ratio of each super reach type is set to, for example, 3 due to the restriction on the number of production random numbers. It is not possible to distribute evenly (1: 1: 1) for each type. That is, the ratio of each super reach type cannot be set freely.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, 60 random number values for determining the super reach types A to C are set, and the remaining random number values are distributed to “reselection”, whereby each of the super reach types A to C is set. Can be made equal (the selection ratio of the super reach types A to C is 1: 1: 1).

  Note that the selection ratio of each super reach type is not limited to 1: 1: 1. An arbitrary selection ratio can be obtained by determining a predetermined radix and assigning a multiple of the random number for production to each super reach type. For example, it is assumed that 30 is set as the predetermined radix and super reach type A: super reach type B: super reach type C = 1: 2: 4 is set as the selection ratio. In this case, 30 (30 × 1) production random numbers are assigned to the super reach type A, and 60 (30 × 2) production random values are assigned to the super reach type B. It is only necessary to assign 120 (30 × 4) effect random numbers for reach type C. Further, the remaining 46 (256-30-60-120) effect random numbers may be assigned to “reselection”. With this configuration, it is possible to realize a selection ratio (that is, 1: 2: 4) as set without generating a fraction.

  As shown in FIG. 79 (d), in the outlier super reach selection table 222a3b, the super random type A is associated with the range of the production random number “0 to 80”, and the range of “81 to 160”. Is associated with the super reach type B, and the range of “161 to 240” is associated with the super reach type C. In addition, “reselection” is associated with the remaining “241 to 255” ranges. That is, 80 random numbers for performance are assigned to each super reach type. Thereby, similarly to the big hit super reach selection table 222a3a, the selection ratio of each super reach type can be strictly 1: 1: 1.

  The outlier super reach selection table 222a3b is configured such that the probability that “re-selection” is determined is lower (big hit: 76/256, out: 16/256). Although details will be described later, the present embodiment is configured to execute an effect with a higher expectation degree of jackpot as “re-selection” is continuously determined. Therefore, if it becomes easy to select “reselection” regardless of detachment, it becomes easy to be in a situation where the detachment is finally notified despite the fact that the production with high expectation is executed. There is a risk of cuddling. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the probability that “reselection” is determined in the case of losing is reduced compared to the case where it is a jackpot, and in the case of losing, the player has an excessive expectation. It is set as the structure which prevents (suppresses). Thereby, the interest with respect to a player's game can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 80A to 80C, details of the above-described pseudo-variation complement effect selection table 222d will be described. As shown in FIG. 80 (a), the pseudo-variation supplementary effect selection table 222d is composed of at least a jackpot supplementary effect selection table 222d1 and a removal supplementary effect selection table 222d2. This pseudo-variation supplementary effect selection table 222d is a data table for determining a display mode for 15 to 40 seconds after the start of variation of the variation pattern corresponding to super reach.

  In the present embodiment, when “reselection” is determined when selecting a variation effect mode of 60 seconds corresponding to super reach, a pseudo variation effect of 15 seconds (after the symbol is displayed in a variable manner, “3 ”,“ 4 ”, and a combination of main symbols with numbers“ 1 ”(a display effect that is stopped and displayed by a combination of so-called chance eyes). The pseudo fluctuation supplementary effect selection table 222d is a data table for selecting a display mode after the pseudo fluctuation display for 15 seconds is completed.

  The big hit supplementary effect selection table 222d1 is data in which the number of pseudo fluctuation displays displayed in the period of 15 to 40 seconds after the start of fluctuation of the hit super reach is defined in association with the number of times of “reselection”. It is a table. As shown in FIG. 80 (b), the number of times “reselection” is continuously determined is within the range of “0 to 3” until the mode of winning super reach is determined from the jackpot super reach selection table 222 a 3 a. If so, the supplementary effect A is set as a display mode at the time of super reach. In the supplementary effect A, a fluctuating display (pseudo stop) is not performed once in a period of 15 to 40 seconds after the start of fluctuation, and a fluctuating display in which a symbol indicating a big hit is finally stopped is executed. This is a mode. In other words, it is executed in the first 15 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, and the fluctuation display is executed twice in total, that is, the pseudo fluctuation display in which the chance chance is stopped and the fluctuation display in which the symbol indicating the jackpot is stopped. The

  In addition, in the range where the number of times of “reselection” is determined to be “4 to 6”, a supplementary effect B in which pseudo change display (pseudo stop) is performed once in 15 to 40 seconds after start of change is selected. In the range where the number of times of “reselection” is determined to be “7 to 9”, the supplementary effect C in which pseudo change display (pseudo stop) is performed twice in 15 to 40 seconds after the start of change is selected. In addition, in the range where the number of times of “reselection” is “10 or more”, the supplementary effect D in which the pseudo variation display (pseudo stop) is performed three times within 15 to 40 seconds after the variation start is selected. The

  As described above, the hit super reach is more likely to be “re-selected” when determining the type of super reach. Then, as shown in FIG. 80B, the more the “re-selection” is determined, the more the number of times that the pseudo variation display (pseudo stop) is executed. Therefore, as the number of executions of the pseudo variation display (pseudo stop) increases, the player's expectation for the jackpot can be increased. Therefore, the number of executions of the pseudo variation display (pseudo stop) can be noted. it can. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the game from becoming monotonous.

  The complementary supplementary effect selection table 222d2 is data in which the number of pseudo fluctuation displays displayed in the period of 15 seconds to 40 seconds after the start of fluctuation of the outlier super reach is defined in association with the number of times of “reselection”. It is a table. As shown in FIG. 80 (c), the number of times that “reselection” is continuously determined until the mode of outlier superreach is determined from the outlier superreach selection table 222 a 3 b is in the range of “0 to 3”. If there is, there is no pseudo fluctuation display (pseudo stop) between 15 seconds and 40 seconds after the fluctuation starts, and a complementary display is executed in which a fluctuation display is executed in which a symbol indicating a big hit is finally stopped. A is selected. In other words, it is executed in the first 15 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, and the fluctuation display is executed twice in total, that is, the pseudo fluctuation display in which the chance chance is stopped and the fluctuation display in which the symbol indicating the outage is stopped. The

  In addition, in the range where the number of times of “reselection” is determined to be “4 to 6”, a supplementary effect B in which pseudo change display (pseudo stop) is performed once in 15 to 40 seconds after start of change is selected. In the range where the number of times of “reselection” is “7 or more”, the supplementary effect C in which the pseudo change display (pseudo stop) is performed twice within 15 to 40 seconds after the start of change is selected. The That is, in the outlier super reach, the total of the pseudo variation display executed in 15 seconds after the start of the variation and the pseudo variation display executed in the period of 15 seconds to 40 seconds (the display number of the chances) ) Is a maximum of 3 times (less than the upper limit of the hit super reach). Therefore, in one super reach, it is determined that a big hit will be made when the chance is displayed four times. Therefore, the player is made to pay attention to the number of times of fluctuating display (number of times of chance). be able to. Therefore, the player's willingness to participate in the game can be improved.

<Regarding Control Processing of Sound Lamp Control Device in Fifth Embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, with reference to FIG. 81, the main process 6 (see FIG. 81) of the sound lamp control device 113 in the present embodiment will be described.

  In each process of S1201 to S1210, S1212 and S1214 to S1218 of the main process 6 (see FIG. 81) in the fifth embodiment, S1201 to S1210, S1212 of the main process (see FIG. 30) in the first embodiment, respectively. And the same process as each process of S1214-S1218 is performed. Also, in the main process 6 (see FIG. 81) in the fifth embodiment, after the process of S1210 is completed, next, when “re-selection” is determined in the previous super-reach mode selection process, the production disturbance Fluctuation reselection processing for newly acquiring a numerical value and selecting the super reach mode again is executed (S1291), and the processing proceeds to S1212. Details of the change reselection processing (S1291) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the main process 6 (see FIG. 84) in the present embodiment, after executing the command determination process (S1212), the variable display setting process 6 is executed (S1213), and the process proceeds to S1214 and subsequent steps. This variation display setting process 6 (S1213) is executed instead of the variation display setting process (see FIG. 32) in the first embodiment. Details of the variation display setting process 6 (S1213) will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 and 83. FIG.

  FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing the above-described variable display setting process 6 (S1213). This variation display setting process 6 (S1213) is received from the main control device 110 in order to execute a variation effect in the third symbol display device 81, similarly to the variation display setting process (see FIG. 32) in the first embodiment. This is a process of setting a display variation pattern command based on the variation pattern command.

  Among the variable display setting process 6 (S1213) in the fifth embodiment, in each process of S1401 to S1405 and S1407 to S1410, S1401 to S1405 of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 32) in the first embodiment, respectively. And the same process as each process of S1407-S1410 is performed. Further, in the variation display setting process 6 (S1213) in the present embodiment, when the process of S1403 is completed, a detailed mode of the variation pattern is determined based on the variation pattern (variation time) extracted in the process of S1403. The variation pattern selection process is executed (S1431), and the process proceeds to S1404 and subsequent steps. Details of the variation pattern selection processing (S1431) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the above-described variation pattern selection process (S1431). By this variation pattern selection process (S1431), the detailed display mode of the variation pattern according to the variation pattern command from main controller 110 is determined (selected). In this variation pattern selection process (S1431), first, the register value of the effect random number generation IC 800 is acquired as the effect random number (S5001). Next, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern extracted in the process of S1403 of the variation display setting process 6 (see FIG. 82) is a superreach variation pattern (S5002).

  In the process of S5002, in the process of S5002, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern notified by the current fluctuation pattern command is not super reach (S5002: No), the table corresponding to the extracted fluctuation type is stored in the fluctuation pattern table 222a. Selection is made from each table, and the display mode of the variation pattern is determined (selected) based on the selected table and the random number value for the effect acquired in the processing of S5001 (S5004), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5002 that the pattern is a change pattern of super reach (S5002: Yes), the effect random number obtained by the process of S5001 is compared with the super reach selection table 222a3, and The mode of the variation pattern corresponding to the random value is determined (selected) (S5003). As described above, if the variation pattern notified by the variation pattern command is a hit super reach, the big hit super reach selection table 222a3a is compared with the effect random number. On the other hand, if the variation pattern notified by the variation pattern command is an outlier super reach, the outlier super reach selection table 222a3b is compared with the effect random number value.

  When the processing of S5003 is completed, it is determined whether or not “reselection” is determined (selected) from the jackpot super reach selection table 222a3a or the missed super reach selection table 222a3b (S5005). Is determined (S5005: Yes), a pseudo-variation pattern (a pseudo-variation display of 15 seconds that is stopped and displayed at the chance) is selected for 15 seconds from the start of the variation (S5006). The reselection flag 223m is set to ON (S5007), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S5005 that the “re-selection” is not determined (selected) from the jackpot super-reach selection table 222a3a or the out-going super-reach selection table 222a3b (S5005: No) Then, the mode (long super reach mode) in which the pseudo variation display is not executed and the 60 seconds variation display is executed is selected (determined) as the display mode of the current variation pattern (S5008), and this process is terminated. .

  As described above, in the variation pattern selection process (S1431), after the variation pattern command is received, the variation pattern to be selected is changed depending on whether or not “re-selection” is determined when the first variation pattern mode is selected. (Aspect of pseudo-variation pattern of 15 seconds or long super reach of 60 seconds) When “reselection” is selected, by setting a short pseudo fluctuation pattern for 15 seconds, the mode of the fluctuation pattern can be determined (selected) with certainty during that 15 seconds. When “reselect” is selected, the variation reselection processing (S1291) that is repeated until the variation pattern mode is selected is executed every millisecond in the main processing 6 (see FIG. 81). Therefore, even if the reselection is repeated up to 15000 times in 15 seconds, the variation pattern can be selected. The probability of determining “reselection” is 76/256 for the jackpot super reach selection table 222a3a, and 16/256 for the outlier super reach selection table 222a3b. For this reason, the probability that “reselection” is determined 5000 times in succession is about 1 / 2.5 × 10 to the 7911th power even in the case of a jackpot with a high probability, and the probability is low enough to be statistically ignored. . Therefore, when “reselection” is determined, the time for executing the process of reselecting the variation pattern mode can be secured by setting the mode of the pseudo variation pattern for 5 seconds. Also, the fluctuating effect for 15 seconds is set to the same mode (a mode in which the chance eyes are stopped and displayed) that is likely to be executed 15 to 40 seconds after the start of variation. Thus, it is possible to set the start of an effect in which chances are continuously displayed.

  Next, the details of the variation reselecting process (S1291) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. As described above, this variation reselection process (S1291), when “reselection” is determined in the process of selecting the previous super reach mode, newly obtains a production random number and re-super This is a process for selecting an aspect.

  In this variation reselection process (S1291), it is first determined whether or not the variation reselection flag 223m is on (S5101). If it is determined that it is off (S5101), the variation pattern mode is reselected. This means that there is no need to do so, and this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5101 that the fluctuation reselection flag 223m is on (S5101), the fluctuation pattern in the previous fluctuation pattern selection process (see FIG. 83) or the fluctuation reselection process (see FIG. 84). "Reselection" is determined (selected) when selecting the mode of the change, meaning that the mode of the variation pattern has not been determined. First, the register value of the production random number generation IC 800 is newly set as the production random number value. (S5102), and 1 is added to the value of the fluctuation reselection counter 223n (S5103), thereby updating the number of times “reselection” is determined (selected) continuously.

  When the processing of S5103 is completed, the random number for performance newly acquired by the processing of S5103 is compared with the super reach selection table 222a3 (see FIGS. 79 (b) to (d)), and the performance randomness is compared. A variation pattern corresponding to the numerical value is determined (selected) (S5104). Next, it is determined whether or not the determination (selection) result by the process of S5104 is “reselection” (S5105). If it is “reselection” (S5105: Yes), this process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S5105 that the determined (selected) is not “re-selected” (that is, any of the super reach types A to C is determined (selected)) (S5105: No). , The value of the variation reselection counter 223n is compared with the pseudo variation supplementary effect selection table 222d (see FIGS. 80A to 80C), and the pseudo rerun counter 223n is executed in the period of 15 seconds to 40 seconds after the start of the variation. A mode of an effect (pseudo-variation supplementary effect) in which chance chances are stopped and displayed 0 to 3 times by typical change display is selected (S5106).

  When the processing of S5106 is completed, next, a 20-second super reach mode (short super reach mode) corresponding to the selected type of pseudo-variation supplementary effect is selected (S5107). In the case of the short super reach, the combination of stop symbols that finally shows a stop is displayed in a stop manner in the case of a disengagement super reach, and in the case of a hit super reach, the stop symbol that finally shows a jackpot is stopped and displayed. Note that this short super-reach mode starts from a state in which the symbols are changing. In accordance with this, each pseudo-variation supplementary effect (complementary effects AD) displays a state in which the symbol is changing at the end of the execution period (40 seconds after the start of change). Thereby, it can be made difficult for the player to recognize the change from the pseudo-variation supplementary effect to the short super-reach mode. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from feeling uncomfortable with the display mode at the time of super reach, and to play the game with peace of mind.

  After the processing of S5107, a display variation pattern addition command for notifying the display control device 114 of the mode of the pseudo variation complementing effect selected in the processing of S5106 and the mode of short super reach selected in the processing of S5107. It is set (S5108), the fluctuation reselection counter 223n is initialized to 0 (S5109), the fluctuation reselection flag 223m is set to off (S5110), and this process ends.

  With this variation reselection process (S1291), it is possible to display a variation pattern of a different mode according to the number of times of “reselection” determination, so that various rendering modes can be realized. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment, when a variation pattern (variation time) corresponding to super reach is notified by a variation pattern command and the variation of the variation pattern is selected by the audio lamp control device 113, “Reselection” is determined with a predetermined probability. More specifically, when the variation pattern (variation time) notified from the main control device 110 is super reach (60 seconds), “reselection” is determined at a predetermined rate. In addition, in the present embodiment, the ratio at which “reselection” is determined varies depending on whether the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot or not. And when determining the production | generation aspect of a super reach, it is comprised so that the production | generation of a different aspect may be performed according to the frequency | count that "re-selection" was determined continuously. Thereby, since it can be predicted whether it is a big hit or a loss according to the production mode at the time of super reach, the player can be noticed by the production. Therefore, the player's willingness to participate can be improved.

  In this embodiment, when “reselection” is determined (selected) in the variation pattern selection process, a short pseudo variation pattern of 15 seconds is set. As a result, it is possible to reliably determine (select) the variation pattern mode during the 15 seconds. Furthermore, since the 15-second effect is set in the same system as the pseudo-variation supplementary effect set after the passage of the period, the 15-second effect and the subsequent pseudo-variable complement effect are mutually related. Production can be displayed. Therefore, since the player's interest can be attracted to the contents of the production, the player's willingness to participate can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, when “reselection” is determined, the pseudo variation display is executed once in the first 15 seconds after the start of the variation. It is not limited to once, and may be executed twice or more.

  In the present embodiment, the pseudo variation effect (the number of times the chance is displayed) is set to a maximum of four times, but the number of display times can be set to an arbitrary number.

  You may implement this invention in the pachinko machine etc. of a different type from said each embodiment. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition that a special ball is awarded to the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as various game machines such as an alepatchi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating a control lever in a state where a symbol effective line is determined by inserting coins, and a symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating a stop button. Is. Accordingly, the basic concept of the slot machine is that it is provided with a display device for confirming and displaying the identification information after variably displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and resulting from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variation display of the identification information is started, and the variation display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific condition. In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, etc. Take as an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided that displays a symbol after a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is variably displayed, and has a handle for launching a ball. What is not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only a ball can be handled as a gaming value in the gaming hall. Therefore, the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of the gaming machine can be solved.

  In addition, you may naturally comprise each embodiment mentioned above, each control example, or it combining the part. Furthermore, although comprised with the some control apparatus, you may comprise with one integrated control apparatus or the control apparatus which integrated several.

  The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention is shown below.

<Characteristic A group> (Re-lottery to be an integer ratio)
A generating unit capable of updating and generating a determination value within a predetermined range, an acquiring unit for acquiring the determination value generated by the generating unit, and a setting in which the determination value acquired by the acquiring unit is set in advance A gaming machine comprising: a discriminating unit that discriminates whether the value matches the value; and a control unit that executes processing set in accordance with the set value when the discriminating unit discriminates the set value. When the determination value acquired by the acquisition unit is determined to be a specific determination value different from the set value, the acquisition unit is configured to acquire the determination value newly generated by the generation unit. The acquisition control means for controlling the means and the number set for the specific determination value is the difference between the number of determination values in the predetermined range and the number set for the specific determination value. Above Gaming machine A1, wherein the ratio of the number set in the value is one that is set to be an integer.

  Here, for example, gaming machines that perform various types of lottery such as a lottery for determining whether or not to win based on the winning of a game ball at a start winning opening, and a lottery for display effects are known. In such a lottery, a determination value (for example, a random number counter or the like) is determined based on whether or not it matches a predetermined set value, and if the determination value matches the set value, it corresponds to the set value. In some cases, the process set (such as determining the aspect of the effect) is executed (for example, JP-A-2002-331078). In this case, the ratio of the number of preset values to the number of values that the judgment value can take (that is, the probability of various lottery results) becomes a fraction or decimal, and when it is converted to a percentage, a fraction (decimal point) ) Usually occurred. That is, the probability (percentage) of various lottery results could not be converted to an integer. However, in the development stage of gaming machines, it is common to design the percentage that will be the lottery result as a percentage. For this reason, when the designer distributes the number of set values that result in various lottery results at the development stage of the gaming machine, the probability of each lottery result designed as a percentage (percentage) and each judgment value according to the percentage There is a possibility that it becomes difficult for the designer to intuitively understand the correspondence with the number. That is, the design may become inefficient.

  In addition, when announcing the probability (ratio) of each lottery result, in many cases, it is common to publish a numerical value converted to a percentage, but when a fraction (decimal point) occurs, Depending on how the fractional part is rounded down, the total of the percentages may not be 100%.

  In contrast, in the gaming machine A1, when it is determined that the determination value acquired by the acquisition unit is a specific determination value different from the set value, the determination value newly generated by the generation unit is acquired. The acquisition means is controlled by the acquisition control means. Here, the number set for the specific determination value is the ratio of the number set for the set value to the difference between the number of determination values in the predetermined range and the number set for the specific determination value. Is set to be an integer.

  Thereby, since the ratio of the number set to the set value can be set to a value that can be easily understood intuitively, there is an effect that the design can be efficiently performed in the development stage of the gaming machine. Further, there is an effect that the ratio of the number set as the set value can be set to a value that is more easily understood by the player. That is, there is an effect that the set value can be suitably set.

  In the gaming machine A1, the generating means updates the determination value in a shorter time than the shortest interval in which the acquisition means acquires the determination value.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A1, the determination value is updated by the generation unit in a shorter period than the shortest interval at which the acquisition unit acquires the determination value. It can be suppressed that the same determination value is acquired a plurality of times by the acquisition means before the acquisition. Therefore, there is an effect that it can be suppressed that the discrimination result by the discrimination means becomes a biased result.

  In the control process executed by the control means in the gaming machine A1 or A2, a plurality of different control processes are set, and each of the control processes that can be executed by the control means has one or a plurality of set values. The gaming machine A3 is characterized in that the assigned control means executes the control process corresponding to the set value determined by the determination means.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1 or A2, the following effects are produced. That is, a plurality of different control processes are set in the control process executed by the control means. One or a plurality of setting values are assigned to each control process that can be executed by the control means. Then, a control process corresponding to the set value determined by the determination unit is executed by the control unit.

  As a result, different control processes can be executed according to the determination result of the determination means, so that a variety of control processes can be executed.

  In the gaming machine A3, the number of the set values assigned to each of the control processes that can be executed by the control means corresponds to the difference between the number of determination values in the predetermined range and the number set in the specific determination value. A gaming machine A4, characterized in that the ratio is set to be an integer.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A3, the number of set values assigned to each of the control processes that can be executed by the control means is set to the number of judgment values in a predetermined range and a specific judgment value. Since the ratio with respect to the difference from the number is set to be an integer, there is an effect that the design can be performed more efficiently in the development stage of the gaming machine. Further, there is an effect that the ratio of the number set as the set value can be set to a value that is more easily understood by the player.

  The number of consecutive times when the determination value is determined to be the specific determination value continuously without being determined by any of the gaming machines A1 to A4 to match the predetermined set value by the determination means A gaming machine A5, comprising: a number counting means for counting the number of times, and a determination end means for ending the determination by the determination means based on the fact that the continuous number of times counted by the number counting means has reached a specific number.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the following effects are produced. That is, the number of consecutive times when the determination value is determined to be a specific determination value without being determined to match the predetermined set value by the determination means is counted by the number counting means. Based on the fact that the number of consecutive times counted by the means has reached a specific number of times, the determination by the determination means is ended by the determination end means.

  Accordingly, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the occurrence of problems such as being continuously determined as a specific determination value and being unable to execute other control processes during that time.

  A gaming machine A6, comprising: an execution control unit that causes the control unit to execute specific control when the determination unit ends the determination in the gaming machine A5.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A5, when the discrimination by the discrimination means is ended by the discrimination end means, the control means is caused to execute specific control by the execution control means. There is an effect that the control can be performed normally even when the determination is finished without the determined value matching the set value.

  The number set in the specific determination value in any of the gaming machines A1 to A6 is the difference between the number of determination values in the predetermined range and the number set in the specific determination value. The gaming machine A7 is characterized in that the ratio of the number set to the set value is set to be an integer in percentage notation.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the number set in the specific determination value is set to the number of determination values in the predetermined range and the specific determination value. Since the ratio of the number set to the set value is set to an integer in percentage notation for the number difference, the effect that the design can be performed more efficiently at the development stage of the gaming machine There is. Further, there is an effect that the ratio of the number set as the set value can be set to a value that is more easily understood by the player.

  A display means for displaying a display effect in any of the gaming machines A1 to A7, and an effect execution means for executing the display effect in the display means, wherein the control means is configured to display the display effect executed by the effect execution means. A gaming machine A8 is characterized in that the type set corresponding to the set value is selected as the type.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A7, the following effects are produced. In other words, the display effect is executed by the effect executing means on the display means for displaying the display effect. As the type of display effect executed by the effect executing means, the type set by the control means corresponding to the set value is selected.

  Thereby, there exists an effect that the ratio by which a display effect is selected can be made into a value which a player can understand easily.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A8, the acquisition control unit includes a plurality of control units that repeatedly execute a plurality of control processes including determination by the determination unit according to a predetermined control procedure, wherein the acquisition control unit acquires the determination value acquired by the acquisition unit Is determined to be the specific determination value different from the set value, the control unit newly executes the other control processing based on the predetermined control procedure, and then generates the determination value newly generated by the generation unit The gaming machine A9 is characterized in that the acquisition means is controlled so as to acquire.

  According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A8, the following effects are produced. That is, a plurality of control processes including determination by the determination unit are repeatedly executed by the plurality of control units according to a predetermined control procedure. When it is determined that the determination value acquired by the acquisition unit is a specific determination value different from the set value, another control process based on a predetermined control procedure is executed and then newly generated by the generation unit The acquisition means is controlled by the acquisition control means so as to acquire the determined determination value.

  As a result, when the acquired determination value is a specific determination value, it is possible to suppress the acquisition of a new determination value without executing another control process, so that the other control process is delayed. There is an effect that it can be executed normally without any problems.

<Characteristic B group> (pseudo fluctuation start based on the passage of a certain interval on the sub side)
Main control means for executing control of the game and peripheral control means for executing control of the game based on a control signal output from the main control means, and the main control means has a determination value within a predetermined range. A generation unit that updates and generates, an acquisition unit that acquires the determination value based on establishment of an acquisition condition from the generation unit, and a storage unit that stores determination value information based on the determination value acquired from the acquisition unit When the determination value information is stored in the storage means, the number information signal generating means for generating a number information signal indicating the number of the stored determination value information and the determination value information acquired from the acquisition means And a dynamic display period determining means for determining a dynamic display period for dynamically displaying on the display means identification information indicating the determination result of the determination means. Benefits advantageous to the player when the period information signal generating means for generating the period information signal indicating the dynamic display period determined by the determining means and the identification information indicating the specific determination result are displayed on the display means In the gaming machine having the dynamic display period and the dynamic display execution means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means indicated by the received period information signal. After the dynamic display of the identification information is completed, when a predetermined period of time has passed, the display means is operated on the display means on the condition that the judgment value information is stored in the storage means. A game machine B1 characterized by having an effect symbol dynamic display means for starting a target display.

  Here, for example, there is a gaming machine in which a fluctuating effect is started based on the winning of a game ball at the start opening. The variable effect is started immediately after winning (for example, within 1 second) if the winning is not put on hold, and if the winning is put on hold, immediately after the end of the changing effect based on the winning immediately before the hold ( For example, it is usually started within 1 second (for example, JP 2009-050734 A). In such a gaming machine, if the instruction to start the variation effect is delayed and the variation effect is not started promptly, an impression that the gaming machine is not operating normally is given to the player. There was a risk of distrust.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine B1, in the peripheral control means, the dynamic display period and identification information indicated by the received period information signal are dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means. When the predetermined period of time has elapsed after the dynamic display of the identification information has been completed, the effect is displayed on the display means by the effect symbol dynamic display means on the condition that the judgment value information is stored in the storage means. The dynamic display of symbols is started.

  Thereby, when a predetermined period passes without receiving a period information signal, it can be recognized that it is operating normally by dynamic display of a production symbol. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust.

  In the gaming machine B1, the dynamic display period determination unit corresponds to the setting value when the determination unit determines that the determination value acquired by the acquisition unit matches a predetermined setting value. The main control means determines the dynamic display period, and when the determination value acquired by the acquisition means is determined to be a specific determination value different from the set value, the main control means newly sets the dynamic display period. The acquisition control means for controlling the acquisition means so as to acquire the determination value generated at the same time includes the number of determination values in the predetermined range and the specific determination value. The gaming machine B2 is characterized in that the ratio of the number set to the set value is set to an integer with respect to the difference from the number set to the value.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine B1, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the determination unit determines that the determination value acquired by the acquisition unit matches a predetermined set value, the dynamic display period corresponding to the set value is determined by the dynamic display period determination unit. Here, when the main control means determines that the determination value acquired by the acquisition means is a specific determination value different from the set value, the acquisition is performed so as to acquire the determination value newly generated by the generation means. The means is controlled by the acquisition control means. The number set for the specific judgment value is the ratio of the number set for the set value to the difference between the number of judgment values in the predetermined range and the number set for the specific judgment value. Is set to be an integer.

  As a result, since the rate at which the dynamic display period is determined can be an integer, when designing the rate of the dynamic display period at the development stage of the gaming machine, the effect of being able to design efficiently There is. In addition, there is an effect that the rate at which the dynamic display period is determined can be set to a value more easily understood by the player.

  In the gaming machine B1 or B2, a plurality of the dynamic display periods are set as the dynamic display periods determined by the dynamic display period determining means, and the dynamic display periods can be determined by the dynamic display period determining means. Each dynamic display period is assigned one or more set values, and the dynamic display period determining means determines the dynamic display period corresponding to the set value determined by the determining means. A gaming machine B3 characterized by being a thing.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B1 or B2, the following effects are produced. That is, a plurality of dynamic display periods are set as the dynamic display periods determined by the dynamic display period determining unit. One or a plurality of setting values are assigned to each of the dynamic display periods that can be determined by the dynamic display period determining means. The dynamic display period corresponding to the set value determined by the determination unit is determined by the dynamic display period determination unit.

  As a result, different dynamic display periods can be determined according to the set values determined by the determination means, so that the determined dynamic display periods can be varied. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine B3, the number of the set values assigned to each of the dynamic display periods that can be determined by the dynamic display period determination means is the number of the determination values in the predetermined range and the specific determination value. The gaming machine B4 is characterized in that a ratio with respect to a difference from the number set in is set to be an integer.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B3, the number of set values assigned to each of the dynamic display periods that can be determined by the dynamic display period determining means is the number of determination values in a predetermined range. Since the ratio with respect to the difference between the value and the number set for the specific determination value is set to an integer, the ratio at which each dynamic display period is determined can be set to an integer. Therefore, when designing the ratio at which each dynamic display period is determined in the development stage of the gaming machine, there is an effect that the design can be performed efficiently. Further, there is an effect that the ratio at which each dynamic display period is determined can be set to a value that is more easily understood by the player.

  In any of the gaming machines B1 to B4, the peripheral control means does not receive the period information signal even if a specific period has elapsed after the dynamic display of the effect symbols is started by the effect symbol dynamic display means. A gaming machine B5, comprising a notification mode setting means for setting a specific notification mode in the event of a failure.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines B1 to B4, in the peripheral control means, the period information is displayed even if a specific period has elapsed since the dynamic display of the production symbols is started by the production symbol dynamic display means. When the signal is not received, the specific notification mode is set by the notification mode setting means, so the player or the hall clerk recognizes that the period information signal has not been received for the specific period by the specific notification mode. There is an effect that can be made.

  In the gaming machine B5, the specific period is a period shorter than the dynamic display period indicated by the period information signal.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B5, the specific period is set to a period shorter than the dynamic display period indicated by the period information signal. It can suppress that it continues over a target display. Therefore, there is an effect that the malfunction of the period information signal can be notified earlier.

  In any of the gaming machines B2 to B6, the number set for the specific determination value is the difference between the number of determination values in the predetermined range and the number set for the specific determination value. The gaming machine B7 is characterized in that the ratio of the number set to the set value is set to be an integer in percentage notation.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines B2 to B6, the number set for the specific determination value is set to the number of determination values in the predetermined range and the specific determination value. When designing the ratio of the dynamic display period at the development stage of the gaming machine, since the percentage of the number set in the set value becomes an integer in percentage notation with respect to the difference from the number In addition, there is an effect that the design can be performed more efficiently. In addition, there is an effect that the rate at which the dynamic display period is determined can be set to a value more easily understood by the player.

  In any one of the gaming machines B2 to B7, the main control unit determines that the determination unit acquires that the determination value acquired by the acquisition unit is a specific determination value different from the set value. Until it is determined that the determination value matches any of the set values, the acquisition control unit repeatedly acquires the new determination value and the determination unit determines the new determination value. A gaming machine B8 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines B2 to B7, when the determination means determines that the determination value acquired by the acquisition means is a specific determination value different from the set value. The main control means repeats the acquisition of a new determination value by the acquisition control means and the determination of the new determination value by the determination means until it is determined that the determination value matches any set value. The dynamic display time can be determined reliably. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem that dynamic display is not executed in the peripheral control means.

<Characteristic C group> (Preliminary discriminating production counter)
A generation unit capable of updating and generating a determination value composed of values within a predetermined range, an acquisition unit for acquiring the determination value from the generation unit based on the establishment of the first condition, and the acquisition unit The determination value acquired by the acquisition means by the determination means and the determination means for determining the determination value acquired by the acquisition means, and the determination value acquired by the acquisition means is a specific determination value Based on the acquisition control means that causes the acquisition means to acquire the newly generated determination value and the establishment of the second condition without storing the specific determination value in the storage means. Control processing determining means for determining a control process to be executed based on the determination value stored in the storage means, and the number of the specific determination values is such that the execution ratio of the control process is an integer ratio. Is set to Gaming machine C1, characterized in that the at it.

  In the gaming machine C1, the storage means is configured to be able to store a predetermined upper limit number of determination values, and when the upper limit number is exceeded, overwrite one of the already stored determination values and store it. A gaming machine C2 characterized in that the game machine C2.

  In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the gaming machine C3 is configured such that the first condition is more easily established than the second condition.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C3, a determination value defining means that preliminarily defines a predetermined number of the determination values and the determination value defined in the determination value defining means are stored in the storage means based on power-on. And a storage control means for controlling to store the predetermined number of determination values other than the specific determination value.

  In any of the gaming machines C1 to C4, the gaming machine control process determining means determines one control process from a plurality of the control processes, and each of the plurality of control processes includes one or a plurality of control processes. The judgment value is assigned, and the number of the judgment values assigned to each of the plurality of control processes is the number of judgment values that are values within the predetermined range and the specific judgment value. The gaming machine C5 is characterized in that a ratio with respect to the difference from the number is set to be an integer.

  The gaming machine C6 according to any one of the gaming machines C1 to C5, wherein the generation unit updates the determination value in a shorter time than the shortest interval in which the acquisition unit acquires the determination value.

<Characteristic D group> (Pseudo ream if replay is pulled)
Based on the entrance means in which a game ball can enter, and the entrance information acquisition means for acquiring entrance information based on the entrance of the game ball into the entrance means, and before the entrance information acquisition means When the discrimination means for executing discrimination based on the entry ball information, the display means for displaying the identification information indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and the identification information indicating the specific discrimination result are displayed on the display means In addition, a privilege granting unit for granting a privilege that is advantageous to the player, a generation unit capable of updating and generating a determination value within a predetermined range in the gaming machine, and the determination generated by the generation unit Acquisition means for acquiring a value, dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means, and a dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means are acquired by the acquisition means. Said judgment And when the dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determination unit and the dynamic display mode determination unit determined based on the determination result and the determination result, the determination value acquired by the acquisition unit is a specific When it is a determination value, when the acquisition control unit that causes the acquisition unit to acquire the determination value newly generated by the generation unit and the dynamic display mode of one are determined, the specific determination value is the acquisition Temporary stop display means that, when acquired by the means, causes the identification information to be temporarily stopped and displayed at least once during execution of the dynamic display mode determined based on the newly acquired determination value. A gaming machine D1 characterized by comprising:

  In the gaming machine D1, the temporary stop display means determines the number of times of temporary stop based on the number of times the specific determination value is acquired when one dynamic display mode is determined. A gaming machine D2 characterized by that.

  The gaming machine D3 is characterized in that the specific determination value in the gaming machine D1 or D2 is set to be large when the determination means determines that the specific determination result is the specific determination result.

  The dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination unit in any of the gaming machines D1 to D3 includes the specific determination result and the specific dynamic display mode determined when determined by the determination unit And at least a plurality of normal dynamic display modes determined when the result is other than the specific determination result, and the determination value for each of the specific dynamic display mode and the normal dynamic display mode. Is a game machine D4 that is assigned and set in advance.

  In the gaming machine D4, the number of the specific determination values is set such that a ratio at which each of the specific dynamic display mode or the normal dynamic display mode is determined is an integer. A gaming machine D5 to play.

<Feature E group> (Common random number acquisition)
The first determination value acquired from the first generation means is the specific first value when the first condition is established with the first generation means that updates and generates the first determination value with a value within the first range. A first discriminating means for discriminating whether the value is one judgment value and a first control means for executing the first control when the first judgment means discriminates that the specific first judgment value is within a second range The second determination value acquired from the second generation means is specified when a second condition that is different from the first condition and the second generation means that updates and generates the second determination value with the value of A second determination unit that determines whether the second determination value is the second determination value and a second control different from the first control when the second determination unit determines that the second determination value is the specific second determination value Based on whether the second control means, the first condition, or the second condition is satisfied. Te, the gaming machine characterized by comprising a obtaining means for obtaining a more and each of the first judgment value and the second judgment value and said first generating means and the second generating means E1.

  Here, for example, there is a gaming machine that draws a special symbol based on the winning of a game ball at the starting port and draws a normal symbol based on the passing of the game ball through a through gate. In such a gaming machine, a special symbol judgment value for drawing a special symbol is obtained based on the winning of a game ball at the start opening, and the normal symbol is obtained based on the passing of the game ball through the through gate. Some of them obtain a normal symbol judgment value for performing a lottery. (For example, JP2012-010910). In this case, there is a problem that the control process needs to be different depending on whether the game ball is won at the start opening and the game ball passes through the through gate, and the control process becomes complicated.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, the first determination value is updated and generated by the first generation means with a value within the first range. When the first condition is satisfied, the first determination unit determines whether the first determination value acquired from the first generation unit is a specific first determination value, and the first determination unit determines a specific first determination. When it is determined that the value is a value, the first control is executed by the first control means. The second determination value is updated and generated by the second generation means with a value within the second range. When a second condition different from the first condition is established, the second determination unit determines whether the second determination value acquired by the second generation unit is a specific second determination value. When the second determination unit determines that the specific second determination value is reached, the second control unit executes a second control different from the first control. Based on the establishment of either the first condition or the second condition, the first determination value and the second determination value are acquired by the acquisition unit by the first generation unit and the second generation unit, respectively.

  Thereby, since the operation of the acquisition unit can be made common between the case where the first condition is satisfied and the case where the second condition is satisfied, there is an effect that the control processing can be prevented from becoming complicated. That is, there is an effect that a suitable control process can be executed.

  A gaming machine E2 comprising storage means for storing the first determination value and the second determination value acquired by the acquisition means in the gaming machine E1 until a predetermined condition is satisfied.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine E1, the first determination value and the second determination value acquired by the acquisition unit are stored until a predetermined condition is satisfied by the storage unit, so that the first determination The determination by the means and the determination by the second determination means can be executed based on each determination value stored in the storage means. That is, since it is not necessary to immediately determine using each determination value acquired by the acquisition means, there is an effect that the degree of freedom of the processing order in the control processing can be increased.

  In the gaming machine E2, the predetermined condition is satisfied when the determination of the first determination means or the second determination means corresponding to the satisfied first condition or second condition is executed. A gaming machine E3.

  According to the gaming machine E3, the predetermined condition is satisfied when the determination of the first determination means or the second determination means corresponding to the satisfied first condition or second condition is executed, and thus is acquired by the acquisition means. It can be suppressed that the first determination value or the second determination value is discarded before being used for the determination. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the determination based on the abnormal determination value.

  In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the first control is a control for giving a first privilege that is advantageous to the player, and the second control is a first that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege. 2. A gaming machine E4, which is a control for giving a privilege.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the following effects are produced. That is, the control for giving the first privilege advantageous to the player by the first control is performed, and the control for giving the second privilege more advantageous to the player than the first privilege by the second control. Done.

  Accordingly, the player can be expected to perform the first control or the second control, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E4, the first condition is provided with a ball entry means for allowing a game ball to enter and a passage means for allowing the game ball to pass therethrough. The first condition is based on a game ball passing through the passage means. The gaming machine E5 is characterized in that the second condition is established based on a game ball entering the ball entry means.

  According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines E1 to E4, the following effects are produced. That is, the first condition is established based on the game ball passing through the passing means through which the game ball can pass, and the second condition is based on the game ball entering the ball entering means through which the game ball can enter. It is established.

  Thereby, it is possible to make the player recognize the opportunity that the first condition and the second condition are satisfied. Therefore, every time it is recognized that the first condition or the second condition is established, the player can be expected to execute the first control or the second control. There is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest in

  The first detection means for detecting the establishment of the first condition, the second detection means for detecting the establishment of the second condition, the first detection means, and the second detection means in any of the gaming machines E1 to E5. A predetermined condition determining unit that determines whether the predetermined condition is satisfied based on the detection result, and a predetermined unit that executes control according to the predetermined condition that is satisfied when the predetermined condition is determined by the predetermined condition determining unit. And a control execution means.

  According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines E1 to E5, the following effects are produced. That is, the establishment of the first condition is detected by the first detection means, and the establishment of the second condition is detected by the second detection means. Based on the detection results of the first detection means and the second detection means, the establishment of the predetermined condition is determined by the predetermined condition determination means, and the determination is made when the predetermined condition determination means determines that the predetermined condition is satisfied. Control according to the predetermined condition is executed by the predetermined control execution means.

  Thus, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the predetermined condition is determined according to the control content of the predetermined control execution unit.

  In the gaming machine E6, the counting means counts the number of times the first detection means detects the establishment of the first condition, and the counting means counts based on the fact that the second detection means detects the establishment of the second condition. Initializing means for initializing a result, and the predetermined condition determining means determines that the predetermined condition is satisfied when the counting result by the counting means is a predetermined number of times or more. A gaming machine E7.

  According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine E6, the following effects are achieved. That is, the number of times that the first detection means detects that the first condition is satisfied is counted by the counting means. The counting result of the counting means is initialized by the initializing means based on the fact that the second condition is detected by the second detecting means. When the counting result by the counting means is a predetermined number or more, the predetermined condition determining means determines that the predetermined condition is satisfied.

  Thereby, it is possible to easily determine whether the first condition is continuously detected a predetermined number of times or more without satisfying the second condition according to the control content of the predetermined control execution means.

  Based on the first determination value and the second determination value acquired by the acquisition unit in any one of the gaming machines E1 to E7, a third generation unit that generates a third determination value and the third generation unit Storage control means for storing the generated third determination value in the storage means until the determination of the first determination means or the second determination means corresponding to the established first condition or second condition is executed. And a specific condition determining means for determining whether a specific condition is satisfied based on the first determination value, the second determination value, and the third determination value stored in the storage means, and the specific condition determining means A gaming machine E8, comprising: a specific control execution unit that executes control based on the satisfied specific condition when it is determined that the specific condition is satisfied.

  According to the gaming machine E8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines E1 to E7, the following effects are produced. That is, based on the first determination value and the second determination value acquired by the acquisition unit, a third determination value is generated by the third generation unit, and the third determination value generated by the third generation unit is The data is stored in the storage means by the storage control means until the determination by the first determination means or the second determination means corresponding to the established first condition or second condition is executed. Based on the first determination value, the second determination value, and the third determination value stored in the storage unit, the specific condition is determined to be satisfied by the specific condition determination unit, and the specific condition is determined by the specific condition determination unit. Is determined, the control based on the established specific condition is output by the specific control execution means.

  Accordingly, there is an effect that it is possible to easily determine whether or not the specific condition is satisfied according to the content of the control executed by the specific control execution unit.

  In the gaming machine E8, the specific condition determination unit is newly generated by the third generation unit based on the third determination value, the first determination value, and the second determination value stored in the storage unit. When the third determination value is different from the third determination value, it is determined that the specific condition is satisfied.

  According to the gaming machine E9, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E8, the game machine E9 is newly generated by the third generation unit based on the third determination value stored in the storage unit, the first determination value, and the second determination value. If the third determination value is different from the third determination value, it is determined that the specific condition is satisfied by the specific condition determination unit. There is an effect that it is possible to determine whether each determination value is normally updated by the means.

  Predetermined determination means for performing a predetermined determination based on the second determination value stored in the storage means when the first condition is satisfied in any of the gaming machines E1 to E9, and a determination result of the predetermined determination means A gaming machine E10, comprising: a notification means for performing notification based on the above.

  According to the gaming machine E10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines E1 to E9, the following effects are produced. That is, when the first condition is satisfied, the predetermined determination is performed by the predetermined determination unit based on the second determination value stored in the storage unit. Then, notification is performed by the notification unit based on the determination result by the predetermined determination unit.

  Thereby, there is an effect that the player can easily know the determination result of the predetermined determination according to the content of the notification by the notification means.

  A display means capable of displaying identification information in the gaming machine E10; and a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means based on the establishment of the second condition. The notifying means displays an effect based on the determination result of the predetermined determining means during execution of the dynamic display by the dynamic display means.

  According to the gaming machine E11, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E10, the following effects are produced. That is, the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means based on the establishment of the second condition on the display means capable of displaying the identification information. Then, during execution of the dynamic display by the dynamic display means, an effect based on the determination result of the predetermined determination means is displayed by the notification means.

  Thereby, since the display mode during execution of dynamic display can be diversified, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

<Feature F group> (Can be obtained twice in one interrupt process)
The first generation means that updates and generates the first determination value with a value within the first range, the second generation means that updates and generates the second determination value with a value within the second range, and the game control process are repeated. In a gaming machine having control means that can be executed and interrupt means that can execute the interrupt process by interrupting the control process of the game based on a predetermined opportunity, the interrupt means satisfies the first condition Based on the above, as one process of the interrupt process, a first acquisition unit that acquires the first determination value and the second determination value from the first generation unit and the second generation unit, respectively, and A second condition different from the first condition and the first control means for executing the first control when it is determined that the first determination value acquired by the first acquisition means is the specific first determination value. Is executed after the first acquisition means based on A second acquisition unit for acquiring the first determination value and the second determination value respectively newly updated by the first generation unit and the second generation unit; Second control means for executing second control different from the first control when it is determined that the second determination value acquired by the second acquisition means is the specific second determination value. A gaming machine F1 characterized by

  Here, for example, there is a gaming machine that draws a special symbol based on the winning of a game ball at the starting port and draws a normal symbol based on the passing of the game ball through a through gate. In such a gaming machine, a special symbol judgment value for drawing a special symbol is obtained based on the winning of a game ball at the start opening, and the normal symbol is obtained based on the passing of the game ball through the through gate. Some of them obtain a normal symbol judgment value for performing a lottery. (For example, JP2012-010910). In this case, there is a problem that the control process needs to be different depending on whether the game ball is won at the start opening and the game ball passes through the through gate, and the control process becomes complicated.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine F1, on the basis of the fact that the first condition is established in the interrupt means, the first determination value and the second generation means are respectively determined as one process of the interrupt process. The second determination value is acquired by the first acquisition means. Then, when it is determined that the first determination value acquired by the first acquisition unit is the specific first determination value, the first control is executed by the first control unit. Also, based on the establishment of a second condition that is different from the first condition, as a process of an interrupt process acquired after the first acquisition unit, the first generation unit and the second generation unit respectively newly The first determination value and the second determination value that have been updated to are acquired by the second acquisition means. When it is determined that the second determination value acquired by the second acquisition means is the specific second determination value, the second control different from the first control is executed by the second control means.

  Thereby, since the 2nd acquisition means acquires the newly updated 1st determination value and 2nd determination value, it is an independent determination different from the 1st determination value and the 2nd determination value acquired by the 1st acquisition means. The value can be obtained. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to ensure fairness when the second control means determines whether the second determination value is the specific second determination value. That is, there is an effect that a suitable control process can be executed.

  In the gaming machine F1, the second generation means updates and generates the second determination value at least between acquisition by the first acquisition means and acquisition by the second acquisition means. Game machine F2.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F1, the second determination value is updated and generated by the second generation unit at least between the acquisition by the first acquisition unit and the acquisition by the second acquisition unit. Therefore, the second determination value acquired based on the establishment of the second condition is a determination value that is newly updated after the second determination value is acquired by the first acquisition unit. Therefore, even if the first determination unit and the second acquisition unit acquire the first determination value and the second determination value, respectively, in the one interrupt process, the second determination acquired by the second acquisition unit The value is an independent determination value different from the second determination value acquired by the first acquisition unit. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to ensure fairness when the second control means determines whether the second determination value is the specific second determination value.

  In the gaming machine F1 or F2, the interrupting means is obtained by the first obtaining means and the second obtaining means when the first condition and the second condition are satisfied in one of the interruption processes. The gaming machine F3 is characterized in that the acquisition is executed in the one interrupt process.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F1 or F2, when the first condition and the second condition are satisfied in one interrupt process, the acquisition by the first acquisition means by the interruption means Since the acquisition by the second acquisition means is executed in one interrupt process, it is possible to determine whether the first condition and the second condition are satisfied in the one interrupt process. In the processing, since the first determination value and the second determination value can be acquired based on the establishment of the first condition and the second condition, respectively, the acquisition of the first determination value and the second determination value is efficiently performed. There is an effect that can be done.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the first control is a control for giving a first privilege advantageous to the player, and the second control is a first advantage that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege. 2. A gaming machine F4, which is control for giving a privilege.

  According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the following effects are produced. That is, the first privilege that is advantageous to the player is provided by the first control. Moreover, the 2nd privilege advantageous to a player rather than a 1st privilege is provided by 2nd control.

  Accordingly, the player can be expected to perform the first control or the second control, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F4, the first condition is based on a passing means through which a game ball can enter and a passing means through which the game ball can pass. The first condition is based on the passing of the game ball through the passing means. The gaming machine F5 is characterized in that the second condition is established based on a game ball entering the ball entry means.

  According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines F1 to F4, the following effects are produced. That is, the first condition is established based on the game ball passing through the passing means. Further, the second condition is established based on the game ball entering the ball entry means.

  Thereby, it is possible to make the player recognize the opportunity that the first condition and the second condition are satisfied. Therefore, every time it is recognized that the first condition or the second condition is established, the player can be expected to execute the first control or the second control. There is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest in

  A gaming machine Z1 characterized in that in any one of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B8, C1 to C6, D1 to D5, E1 to E11, F1 to F5, the gaming machine is a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

  A gaming machine Z2 characterized in that in any one of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B8, C1 to C6, D1 to D5, E1 to E11, F1 to F5, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port disposed at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B8, C1 to C6, D1 to D5, E1 to E11, F1 to F5, the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Characteristic gaming machine Z3. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.
<Others>
There are known gaming machines that perform various types of determination, such as determination of whether or not a game ball is won at a start winning opening and determination of a display effect mode. In such a gaming machine, it is determined whether or not a value of a determination value (for example, a random number counter or the like) matches a predetermined set value, and if the determination value matches the set value, the setting value is handled. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2002-331078).
However, a more suitable setting value setting method has been demanded.
This technical idea has been made to solve the above-described problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably setting a set value.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 includes a generation unit capable of updating and generating a determination value within a predetermined range, and an acquisition unit for acquiring the determination value generated by the generation unit And a determination means for determining whether the determination value acquired by the acquisition means matches a predetermined set value, and if the determination means determines that the determination value matches the set value, Control means for executing processing set correspondingly, and when it is determined that the determination value acquired by the acquisition means is a specific determination value different from the setting value, An acquisition control unit configured to control the acquisition unit so as to acquire the determination value newly generated by the generation unit, and the number set in the specific determination value is equal to the determination value of the predetermined range Number and said specific On the difference between the number set in the value, the ratio of the number set in the set value is one that is set to be an integer.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1, wherein the generation unit updates the determination value in a shorter time than the shortest interval at which the acquisition unit acquires the determination value. is there.
In the gaming machine of technical idea 3, in the gaming machine of technical idea 1 or 2, a plurality of different control processes are set in the control process executed by the control means, and the control means executes Each of the possible control processes is assigned one or more set values, and the control means executes the control process corresponding to the set values determined by the determination means.
The gaming machine of technical idea 4 is the gaming machine of technical idea 3, wherein the number of the set values assigned to each of the control processes executable by the control means is the number of judgment values in the predetermined range. The ratio to the difference from the number set for the specific determination value is set to be an integer.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 5 is the gaming machine according to any one of technical ideas 1 to 4, in which the determination value is continuously determined without being determined by the determination means to match the predetermined set value. Is determined by the determination means based on the fact that the number of consecutive times counted by the number counting means has become the specified number of times. And a discriminating end means for ending.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, when it is determined that the determination value acquired by the acquisition unit is a specific determination value different from the set value, the determination value newly generated by the generation unit is The acquisition means is controlled by the acquisition control means to acquire. Here, the number set for the specific determination value is the ratio of the number set for the set value to the difference between the number of determination values in the predetermined range and the number set for the specific determination value. Is set to be an integer.
Thereby, there exists an effect that a setting value can be set more suitably.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the determination value is updated by the generation unit in a shorter time than the shortest interval at which the acquisition unit acquires the determination value. Therefore, it can be suppressed that the same determination value is acquired a plurality of times by the acquisition unit before the determination value is updated by the generation unit. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the discrimination result by the discrimination means from being biased.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, the following effect is obtained. That is, a plurality of different control processes are set in the control process executed by the control means. One or a plurality of setting values are assigned to each control process that can be executed by the control means. Then, a control process corresponding to the set value determined by the determination unit is executed by the control unit.
As a result, different control processes can be executed according to the determination result of the determination means, so that a variety of control processes can be executed.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, the number of set values assigned to each of the control processes that can be executed by the control means is determined within a predetermined range. Since the ratio to the difference between the number of values and the number set for a specific judgment value is set to an integer, the ratio at which each control process is executed should be a value that is easier for the player to understand. There is an effect that can be.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 5, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine described in any of the technical ideas 1 to 4, the following effects are achieved. That is, the number of consecutive times when the determination value is determined to be a specific determination value without being determined to match the predetermined set value by the determination means is counted by the number counting means. Based on the fact that the number of consecutive times counted by the means has reached a specific number of times, the determination by the determination means is ended by the determination end means.
Accordingly, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the occurrence of problems such as being continuously determined as a specific determination value and being unable to execute other control processes during that time.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
223f Reselection counter (number counting means)
800 Random number generation IC for production (generation means)
S1501 Part of the acquisition unit S1505 Part of the determination unit S1602 Part of the acquisition unit, acquisition control unit S1606 Part of the determination unit

Claims (2)

Updating means for updating the determination value within a predetermined range;
An obtaining unit capable of obtaining the judgment value,
Discrimination means for discriminating based on the determination value acquired by the acquisition means and a predetermined set value;
And control means for executing the set on the basis of the by that determination result to the determining means processing, the gaming machine having a
If the determination value obtained by the obtaining unit is determined to be the different specific determination value and the set value, is acquired by the acquisition unit the judgment value newly updated by the update unit Having acquisition control means,
The number set in the specific determination value is equal to the number set in the set value with respect to the difference between the number of determination values in the predetermined range and the number set in the specific determination value. A gaming machine characterized in that it is set to be an integer when the ratio is expressed as a percentage at least . The gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising display means for indicating the discrimination result.

Images